1 @c Copyright (C) 1988-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
6 @chapter Target Description Macros and Functions
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h} and a C source file named @file{@var{machine}.c}.
15 The header file defines numerous macros that convey the information
16 about the target machine that does not fit into the scheme of the
17 @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be a link to
18 @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h} includes
19 @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include @file{config.h}. The
20 source file defines a variable @code{targetm}, which is a structure
21 containing pointers to functions and data relating to the target
22 machine. @file{@var{machine}.c} should also contain their definitions,
23 if they are not defined elsewhere in GCC, and other functions called
24 through the macros defined in the @file{.h} file.
27 * Target Structure:: The @code{targetm} variable.
28 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
29 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @option{-m68000} and @option{-m68020}.
30 * Per-Function Data:: Defining data structures for per-function information.
31 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
32 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
33 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
34 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
35 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
36 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
37 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
38 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
39 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
40 * Anchored Addresses:: Defining how @option{-fsection-anchors} should work.
41 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
42 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
43 * Scheduling:: Adjusting the behavior of the instruction scheduler.
44 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
45 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
46 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
47 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
48 * Floating Point:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
49 * Mode Switching:: Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
50 * Target Attributes:: Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}.
51 * Emulated TLS:: Emulated TLS support.
52 * MIPS Coprocessors:: MIPS coprocessor support and how to customize it.
53 * PCH Target:: Validity checking for precompiled headers.
54 * C++ ABI:: Controlling C++ ABI changes.
55 * Named Address Spaces:: Adding support for named address spaces
56 * Misc:: Everything else.
59 @node Target Structure
60 @section The Global @code{targetm} Variable
62 @cindex target functions
64 @deftypevar {struct gcc_target} targetm
65 The target @file{.c} file must define the global @code{targetm} variable
66 which contains pointers to functions and data relating to the target
67 machine. The variable is declared in @file{target.h};
68 @file{target-def.h} defines the macro @code{TARGET_INITIALIZER} which is
69 used to initialize the variable, and macros for the default initializers
70 for elements of the structure. The @file{.c} file should override those
71 macros for which the default definition is inappropriate. For example:
74 #include "target-def.h"
76 /* @r{Initialize the GCC target structure.} */
78 #undef TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
79 #define TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES @var{machine}_comp_type_attributes
81 struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
85 Where a macro should be defined in the @file{.c} file in this manner to
86 form part of the @code{targetm} structure, it is documented below as a
87 ``Target Hook'' with a prototype. Many macros will change in future
88 from being defined in the @file{.h} file to being part of the
89 @code{targetm} structure.
91 Similarly, there is a @code{targetcm} variable for hooks that are
92 specific to front ends for C-family languages, documented as ``C
93 Target Hook''. This is declared in @file{c-family/c-target.h}, the
94 initializer @code{TARGETCM_INITIALIZER} in
95 @file{c-family/c-target-def.h}. If targets initialize @code{targetcm}
96 themselves, they should set @code{target_has_targetcm=yes} in
97 @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default definition is used.
99 Similarly, there is a @code{targetm_common} variable for hooks that
100 are shared between the compiler driver and the compilers proper,
101 documented as ``Common Target Hook''. This is declared in
102 @file{common/common-target.h}, the initializer
103 @code{TARGETM_COMMON_INITIALIZER} in
104 @file{common/common-target-def.h}. If targets initialize
105 @code{targetm_common} themselves, they should set
106 @code{target_has_targetm_common=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a
107 default definition is used.
110 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
112 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
114 @c prevent bad page break with this line
115 You can control the compilation driver.
117 @defmac DRIVER_SELF_SPECS
118 A list of specs for the driver itself. It should be a suitable
119 initializer for an array of strings, with no surrounding braces.
121 The driver applies these specs to its own command line between loading
122 default @file{specs} files (but not command-line specified ones) and
123 choosing the multilib directory or running any subcommands. It
124 applies them in the order given, so each spec can depend on the
125 options added by earlier ones. It is also possible to remove options
126 using @samp{%<@var{option}} in the usual way.
128 This macro can be useful when a port has several interdependent target
129 options. It provides a way of standardizing the command line so
130 that the other specs are easier to write.
132 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
135 @defmac OPTION_DEFAULT_SPECS
136 A list of specs used to support configure-time default options (i.e.@:
137 @option{--with} options) in the driver. It should be a suitable initializer
138 for an array of structures, each containing two strings, without the
139 outermost pair of surrounding braces.
141 The first item in the pair is the name of the default. This must match
142 the code in @file{config.gcc} for the target. The second item is a spec
143 to apply if a default with this name was specified. The string
144 @samp{%(VALUE)} in the spec will be replaced by the value of the default
145 everywhere it occurs.
147 The driver will apply these specs to its own command line between loading
148 default @file{specs} files and processing @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}, using
149 the same mechanism as @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}.
151 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
155 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
156 pass to CPP@. It can also specify how to translate options you
157 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP@.
159 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
162 @defmac CPLUSPLUS_CPP_SPEC
163 This macro is just like @code{CPP_SPEC}, but is used for C++, rather
164 than C@. If you do not define this macro, then the value of
165 @code{CPP_SPEC} (if any) will be used instead.
169 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
170 pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
172 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
173 for GCC to pass to front ends.
175 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
179 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
180 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
181 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
183 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
184 Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
185 @code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
186 CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC@.
190 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
191 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
192 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
193 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
195 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
198 @defmac ASM_FINAL_SPEC
199 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
200 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
201 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
204 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
207 @defmac AS_NEEDS_DASH_FOR_PIPED_INPUT
208 Define this macro, with no value, if the driver should give the assembler
209 an argument consisting of a single dash, @option{-}, to instruct it to
210 read from its standard input (which will be a pipe connected to the
211 output of the compiler proper). This argument is given after any
212 @option{-o} option specifying the name of the output file.
214 If you do not define this macro, the assembler is assumed to read its
215 standard input if given no non-option arguments. If your assembler
216 cannot read standard input at all, use a @samp{%@{pipe:%e@}} construct;
217 see @file{mips.h} for instance.
221 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
222 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
223 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
225 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
229 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
230 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
231 command given to the linker.
233 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
234 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
238 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
239 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
240 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
241 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
243 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
244 passes the string @option{-lgcc} to the linker.
247 @defmac REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC
248 By default, if @code{ENABLE_SHARED_LIBGCC} is defined, the
249 @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} is not directly used by the driver program but is
250 instead modified to refer to different versions of @file{libgcc.a}
251 depending on the values of the command line flags @option{-static},
252 @option{-shared}, @option{-static-libgcc}, and @option{-shared-libgcc}. On
253 targets where these modifications are inappropriate, define
254 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} instead. @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} tells the
255 driver how to place a reference to @file{libgcc} on the link command
256 line, but, unlike @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}, it is used unmodified.
259 @defmac USE_LD_AS_NEEDED
260 A macro that controls the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}
261 mentioned in @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}. If nonzero, a spec will be
262 generated that uses @option{--as-needed} or equivalent options and the
263 shared @file{libgcc} in place of the
264 static exception handler library, when linking without any of
265 @code{-static}, @code{-static-libgcc}, or @code{-shared-libgcc}.
269 If defined, this C string constant is added to @code{LINK_SPEC}.
270 When @code{USE_LD_AS_NEEDED} is zero or undefined, it also affects
271 the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} mentioned in
272 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}.
275 @defmac STARTFILE_SPEC
276 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
277 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
278 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
280 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
281 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
285 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
286 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
287 the very end of the command given to the linker.
289 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
292 @defmac THREAD_MODEL_SPEC
293 GCC @code{-v} will print the thread model GCC was configured to use.
294 However, this doesn't work on platforms that are multilibbed on thread
295 models, such as AIX 4.3. On such platforms, define
296 @code{THREAD_MODEL_SPEC} such that it evaluates to a string without
297 blanks that names one of the recognized thread models. @code{%*}, the
298 default value of this macro, will expand to the value of
299 @code{thread_file} set in @file{config.gcc}.
302 @defmac SYSROOT_SUFFIX_SPEC
303 Define this macro to add a suffix to the target sysroot when GCC is
304 configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to search for usr/lib,
305 et al, within sysroot+suffix.
308 @defmac SYSROOT_HEADERS_SUFFIX_SPEC
309 Define this macro to add a headers_suffix to the target sysroot when
310 GCC is configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to pass the
311 updated sysroot+headers_suffix to CPP, causing it to search for
312 usr/include, et al, within sysroot+headers_suffix.
316 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
317 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
320 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
321 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
322 string constant that provides the specification.
324 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
326 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
327 related targets, which have various @code{@dots{}_SPECS} which are similar
328 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
331 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
332 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
333 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
336 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
339 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
340 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
342 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
345 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
349 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
350 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} \
351 %@{!mcall-sysv: %(cpp_sysv_default) @} \
352 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
354 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
355 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
358 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
359 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
362 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
363 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
367 @defmac LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
368 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
369 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
370 the argument @option{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
373 @defmac LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC
374 The sequence in which libgcc and libc are specified to the linker.
375 By default this is @code{%G %L %G}.
378 @defmac LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
379 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
380 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
381 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
382 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
383 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
384 the effect you need. Overriding this macro may be avoidable by overriding
385 @code{LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC} instead.
388 @hook TARGET_ALWAYS_STRIP_DOTDOT
390 @defmac MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
391 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
392 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
393 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
394 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
396 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
397 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
398 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
399 @xref{Target Fragment}.
402 @defmac RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
403 Define this macro to tell @command{gcc} that it should only translate
404 a @option{-B} prefix into a @option{-L} linker option if the prefix
405 indicates an absolute file name.
408 @defmac MD_EXEC_PREFIX
409 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
410 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
411 when the compiler is built as a cross
412 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
413 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.in}.
416 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
417 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
418 standard choice of @code{libdir} as the default prefix to
419 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
420 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX} is not searched when the compiler
421 is built as a cross compiler.
424 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
425 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
426 standard choice of @code{/lib} as a prefix to try after the default prefix
427 when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
428 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1} is not searched when the compiler
429 is built as a cross compiler.
432 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2
433 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
434 standard choice of @code{/lib} as yet another prefix to try after the
435 default prefix when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
436 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2} is not searched when the compiler
437 is built as a cross compiler.
440 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
441 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
442 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
443 compiler is built as a cross compiler.
446 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
447 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
448 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the compiler is built as a
452 @defmac INIT_ENVIRONMENT
453 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
454 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
455 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
456 initialize the necessary environment variables.
459 @defmac LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
460 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
461 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
462 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
463 comes before @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR} (set in
464 @file{config.gcc}, normally @file{/usr/include}) in the search order.
466 Cross compilers do not search either @file{/usr/local/include} or its
470 @defmac NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_COMPONENT
471 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}.
472 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
473 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
476 @defmac INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
477 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
478 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
479 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
480 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
481 @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
482 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
483 and specify private search areas for GCC@. The directory
484 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
486 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
487 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
488 string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
489 for C++-only directories,
490 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
491 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
492 the array with a null element.
494 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
495 if any, in all uppercase letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
496 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
497 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
499 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
502 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
504 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
505 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
506 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
513 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
517 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
520 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or, if @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}
521 is not set and the compiler has not been installed in the configure-time
522 @var{prefix}, the location in which the compiler has actually been installed.
525 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
528 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if the compiler has been installed
529 in the configured-time @var{prefix}.
532 The location @file{/usr/libexec/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
535 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
538 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
542 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
546 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
549 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or its automatically determined
550 value based on the installed toolchain location.
553 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
554 (or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
557 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, but only if the toolchain is installed
558 in the configured @var{prefix} or this is a native compiler.
561 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
564 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
568 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a
569 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
572 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, if defined, but only if this is a
573 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
576 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, with any sysroot modifications.
577 If this path is relative it will be prefixed by @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} and
578 the machine suffix or @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX} and the machine suffix.
581 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, but only if this is a native
582 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
586 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2}, but only if this is a native
587 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
591 @node Run-time Target
592 @section Run-time Target Specification
593 @cindex run-time target specification
594 @cindex predefined macros
595 @cindex target specifications
597 @c prevent bad page break with this line
598 Here are run-time target specifications.
600 @defmac TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS ()
601 This function-like macro expands to a block of code that defines
602 built-in preprocessor macros and assertions for the target CPU, using
603 the functions @code{builtin_define}, @code{builtin_define_std} and
604 @code{builtin_assert}. When the front end
605 calls this macro it provides a trailing semicolon, and since it has
606 finished command line option processing your code can use those
609 @code{builtin_assert} takes a string in the form you pass to the
610 command-line option @option{-A}, such as @code{cpu=mips}, and creates
611 the assertion. @code{builtin_define} takes a string in the form
612 accepted by option @option{-D} and unconditionally defines the macro.
614 @code{builtin_define_std} takes a string representing the name of an
615 object-like macro. If it doesn't lie in the user's namespace,
616 @code{builtin_define_std} defines it unconditionally. Otherwise, it
617 defines a version with two leading underscores, and another version
618 with two leading and trailing underscores, and defines the original
619 only if an ISO standard was not requested on the command line. For
620 example, passing @code{unix} defines @code{__unix}, @code{__unix__}
621 and possibly @code{unix}; passing @code{_mips} defines @code{__mips},
622 @code{__mips__} and possibly @code{_mips}, and passing @code{_ABI64}
623 defines only @code{_ABI64}.
625 You can also test for the C dialect being compiled. The variable
626 @code{c_language} is set to one of @code{clk_c}, @code{clk_cplusplus}
627 or @code{clk_objective_c}. Note that if we are preprocessing
628 assembler, this variable will be @code{clk_c} but the function-like
629 macro @code{preprocessing_asm_p()} will return true, so you might want
630 to check for that first. If you need to check for strict ANSI, the
631 variable @code{flag_iso} can be used. The function-like macro
632 @code{preprocessing_trad_p()} can be used to check for traditional
636 @defmac TARGET_OS_CPP_BUILTINS ()
637 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
638 and is used for the target operating system instead.
641 @defmac TARGET_OBJFMT_CPP_BUILTINS ()
642 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
643 and is used for the target object format. @file{elfos.h} uses this
644 macro to define @code{__ELF__}, so you probably do not need to define
648 @deftypevar {extern int} target_flags
649 This variable is declared in @file{options.h}, which is included before
650 any target-specific headers.
653 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS
654 This variable specifies the initial value of @code{target_flags}.
655 Its default setting is 0.
658 @cindex optional hardware or system features
659 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
661 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION
662 This hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
663 target-specific options described by the @file{.opt} definition files
664 (@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some option-specific
665 processing and should return true if the option is valid. The default
666 definition does nothing but return true.
668 @var{decoded} specifies the option and its arguments. @var{opts} and
669 @var{opts_set} are the @code{gcc_options} structures to be used for
670 storing option state, and @var{loc} is the location at which the
671 option was passed (@code{UNKNOWN_LOCATION} except for options passed
675 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION
676 This target hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
677 target-specific C language family options described by the @file{.opt}
678 definition files(@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some
679 option-specific processing and should return true if the option is
680 valid. The arguments are like for @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION}. The
681 default definition does nothing but return false.
683 In general, you should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION} to handle
684 options. However, if processing an option requires routines that are
685 only available in the C (and related language) front ends, then you
686 should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION} instead.
689 @hook TARGET_OBJC_CONSTRUCT_STRING_OBJECT
691 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_UNRESOLVED_CLASS_REFERENCE
693 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_CLASS_DEFINITION
695 @hook TARGET_STRING_OBJECT_REF_TYPE_P
697 @hook TARGET_CHECK_STRING_OBJECT_FORMAT_ARG
699 @hook TARGET_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS_AFTER_CHANGE
701 @defmac C_COMMON_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
702 This is similar to the @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} hook
703 but is only used in the C
704 language frontends (C, Objective-C, C++, Objective-C++) and so can be
705 used to alter option flag variables which only exist in those
709 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION_TABLE
710 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
711 various optimization levels. This variable, if defined, describes
712 options to enable at particular sets of optimization levels. These
713 options are processed once
714 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
715 of the command options have been parsed, so may be overridden by other
716 options passed explicitly.
718 This processing is run once at program startup and when the optimization
719 options are changed via @code{#pragma GCC optimize} or by using the
720 @code{optimize} attribute.
723 @hook TARGET_OPTION_INIT_STRUCT
725 @hook TARGET_OPTION_DEFAULT_PARAMS
727 @defmac SWITCHABLE_TARGET
728 Some targets need to switch between substantially different subtargets
729 during compilation. For example, the MIPS target has one subtarget for
730 the traditional MIPS architecture and another for MIPS16. Source code
731 can switch between these two subarchitectures using the @code{mips16}
732 and @code{nomips16} attributes.
734 Such subtargets can differ in things like the set of available
735 registers, the set of available instructions, the costs of various
736 operations, and so on. GCC caches a lot of this type of information
737 in global variables, and recomputing them for each subtarget takes a
738 significant amount of time. The compiler therefore provides a facility
739 for maintaining several versions of the global variables and quickly
740 switching between them; see @file{target-globals.h} for details.
742 Define this macro to 1 if your target needs this facility. The default
746 @hook TARGET_FLOAT_EXCEPTIONS_ROUNDING_SUPPORTED_P
748 @node Per-Function Data
749 @section Defining data structures for per-function information.
750 @cindex per-function data
751 @cindex data structures
753 If the target needs to store information on a per-function basis, GCC
754 provides a macro and a couple of variables to allow this. Note, just
755 using statics to store the information is a bad idea, since GCC supports
756 nested functions, so you can be halfway through encoding one function
757 when another one comes along.
759 GCC defines a data structure called @code{struct function} which
760 contains all of the data specific to an individual function. This
761 structure contains a field called @code{machine} whose type is
762 @code{struct machine_function *}, which can be used by targets to point
763 to their own specific data.
765 If a target needs per-function specific data it should define the type
766 @code{struct machine_function} and also the macro @code{INIT_EXPANDERS}.
767 This macro should be used to initialize the function pointer
768 @code{init_machine_status}. This pointer is explained below.
770 One typical use of per-function, target specific data is to create an
771 RTX to hold the register containing the function's return address. This
772 RTX can then be used to implement the @code{__builtin_return_address}
773 function, for level 0.
775 Note---earlier implementations of GCC used a single data area to hold
776 all of the per-function information. Thus when processing of a nested
777 function began the old per-function data had to be pushed onto a
778 stack, and when the processing was finished, it had to be popped off the
779 stack. GCC used to provide function pointers called
780 @code{save_machine_status} and @code{restore_machine_status} to handle
781 the saving and restoring of the target specific information. Since the
782 single data area approach is no longer used, these pointers are no
785 @defmac INIT_EXPANDERS
786 Macro called to initialize any target specific information. This macro
787 is called once per function, before generation of any RTL has begun.
788 The intention of this macro is to allow the initialization of the
789 function pointer @code{init_machine_status}.
792 @deftypevar {void (*)(struct function *)} init_machine_status
793 If this function pointer is non-@code{NULL} it will be called once per
794 function, before function compilation starts, in order to allow the
795 target to perform any target specific initialization of the
796 @code{struct function} structure. It is intended that this would be
797 used to initialize the @code{machine} of that structure.
799 @code{struct machine_function} structures are expected to be freed by GC@.
800 Generally, any memory that they reference must be allocated by using
801 GC allocation, including the structure itself.
805 @section Storage Layout
806 @cindex storage layout
808 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
809 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
810 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
811 @xref{Run-time Target}.
813 @defmac BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
814 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
815 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
816 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
817 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
818 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
819 macro need not be a constant.
821 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
822 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
825 @defmac BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
826 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
827 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
830 @defmac WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
831 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
832 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
833 memory locations and registers; see @code{REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} if the
834 order of words in memory is not the same as the order in registers. This
835 macro need not be a constant.
838 @defmac REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
839 On some machines, the order of words in a multiword object differs between
840 registers in memory. In such a situation, define this macro to describe
841 the order of words in a register. The macro @code{WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} controls
842 the order of words in memory.
845 @defmac FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
846 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
847 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
848 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
849 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
851 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
855 @defmac BITS_PER_WORD
856 Number of bits in a word. If you do not define this macro, the default
857 is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * UNITS_PER_WORD}.
860 @defmac MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
861 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
862 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
863 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
866 @defmac UNITS_PER_WORD
867 Number of storage units in a word; normally the size of a general-purpose
868 register, a power of two from 1 or 8.
871 @defmac MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
872 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
873 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
874 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
878 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
879 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
880 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}. If you do not specify
881 a value the default is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
884 @defmac POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
885 A C expression that determines how pointers should be extended from
886 @code{ptr_mode} to either @code{Pmode} or @code{word_mode}. It is
887 greater than zero if pointers should be zero-extended, zero if they
888 should be sign-extended, and negative if some other sort of conversion
889 is needed. In the last case, the extension is done by the target's
890 @code{ptr_extend} instruction.
892 You need not define this macro if the @code{ptr_mode}, @code{Pmode}
893 and @code{word_mode} are all the same width.
896 @defmac PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
897 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
898 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
899 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
902 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
903 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
904 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
905 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
906 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
909 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
910 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
911 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
912 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
913 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
914 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
916 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
919 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_MODE
921 @defmac PARM_BOUNDARY
922 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
923 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
924 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
928 @defmac STACK_BOUNDARY
929 Define this macro to the minimum alignment enforced by hardware for the
930 stack pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression for the
931 desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a default
932 if @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY} is not defined. On most machines,
933 this should be the same as @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}.
936 @defmac PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
937 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for the
938 stack pointer, greater than what the hardware enforces. The definition
939 is a C expression for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This
940 macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger than
941 @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
944 @defmac INCOMING_STACK_BOUNDARY
945 Define this macro if the incoming stack boundary may be different
946 from @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}. This macro must evaluate
947 to a value equal to or larger than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
950 @defmac FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
951 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
954 @defmac BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
955 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in
956 bits. Note that this is not the biggest alignment that is supported,
957 just the biggest alignment that, when violated, may cause a fault.
960 @defmac MALLOC_ABI_ALIGNMENT
961 Alignment, in bits, a C conformant malloc implementation has to
962 provide. If not defined, the default value is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
965 @defmac ATTRIBUTE_ALIGNED_VALUE
966 Alignment used by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned))} construct. If
967 not defined, the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
970 @defmac MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
971 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
972 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
973 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
974 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
977 @defmac BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
978 Biggest alignment that any structure or union field can require on this
979 machine, in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
980 structure and union fields only, unless the field alignment has been set
981 by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
984 @defmac ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{computed})
985 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} if the
986 alignment computed in the usual way (including applying of
987 @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} and @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT} to the
988 alignment) is @var{computed}. It overrides alignment only if the
989 field alignment has not been set by the
990 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
993 @defmac MAX_STACK_ALIGNMENT
994 Biggest stack alignment guaranteed by the backend. Use this macro
995 to specify the maximum alignment of a variable on stack.
997 If not defined, the default value is @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
999 @c FIXME: The default should be @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1000 @c But the fix for PR 32893 indicates that we can only guarantee
1001 @c maximum stack alignment on stack up to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, not
1002 @c @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, if stack alignment isn't supported.
1005 @defmac MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
1006 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
1007 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
1008 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
1009 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1011 On systems that use ELF, the default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is
1012 the largest supported 32-bit ELF section alignment representable on
1013 a 32-bit host e.g. @samp{(((uint64_t) 1 << 28) * 8)}.
1014 On 32-bit ELF the largest supported section alignment in bits is
1015 @samp{(0x80000000 * 8)}, but this is not representable on 32-bit hosts.
1018 @defmac DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1019 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1020 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1021 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1022 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1024 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1027 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1028 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
1029 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1030 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
1033 @defmac DATA_ABI_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1034 Similar to @code{DATA_ALIGNMENT}, but for the cases where the ABI mandates
1035 some alignment increase, instead of optimization only purposes. E.g.@
1036 AMD x86-64 psABI says that variables with array type larger than 15 bytes
1037 must be aligned to 16 byte boundaries.
1039 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1042 @defmac CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
1043 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
1044 that is being placed in memory. @var{constant} is the constant and
1045 @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
1046 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1049 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1051 The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
1052 constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1053 constants can be done inline.
1056 @defmac LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1057 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1058 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1059 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1060 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1062 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1064 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1065 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1067 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1070 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
1072 @defmac STACK_SLOT_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{mode}, @var{basic-align})
1073 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for stack slot.
1074 @var{type} is the data type, @var{mode} is the widest mode available,
1075 and @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the slot would ordinarily
1076 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1079 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used when
1080 @var{type} is @code{NULL}. Otherwise, @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT} will
1083 This macro is to set alignment of stack slot to the maximum alignment
1084 of all possible modes which the slot may have.
1086 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1089 @defmac LOCAL_DECL_ALIGNMENT (@var{decl})
1090 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a local
1091 variable @var{decl}.
1093 If this macro is not defined, then
1094 @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (TREE_TYPE (@var{decl}), DECL_ALIGN (@var{decl}))}
1097 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1098 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1100 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1103 @defmac MINIMUM_ALIGNMENT (@var{exp}, @var{mode}, @var{align})
1104 If defined, a C expression to compute the minimum required alignment
1105 for dynamic stack realignment purposes for @var{exp} (a type or decl),
1106 @var{mode}, assuming normal alignment @var{align}.
1108 If this macro is not defined, then @var{align} will be used.
1111 @defmac EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
1112 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit-field that follows an
1113 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
1115 If @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} is true, it overrides this macro.
1118 @defmac STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
1119 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
1120 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
1122 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
1123 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1126 @defmac STRICT_ALIGNMENT
1127 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
1128 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
1129 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
1132 @defmac PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
1133 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
1134 alignment of bit-fields and the structures that contain them.
1136 The behavior is that the type written for a named bit-field (@code{int},
1137 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the entire
1138 structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary field of
1139 that type. In addition, the bit-field is placed within the structure so
1140 that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a boundary for it.
1142 Thus, on most machines, a named bit-field whose type is written as
1143 @code{int} would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force
1144 four-byte alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may
1145 not be four bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
1147 An unnamed bit-field will not affect the alignment of the containing
1150 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
1151 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
1153 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
1154 bit-fields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
1155 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
1156 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
1158 The other known way of making bit-fields work is to define
1159 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1160 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
1162 Unless the machine has bit-field instructions or you define
1163 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
1164 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
1166 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
1167 bit-fields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
1168 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
1187 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
1188 sizeof (struct foo1));
1189 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
1190 sizeof (struct foo2));
1195 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
1196 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
1199 @defmac BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1200 Like @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} except that its effect is limited
1201 to aligning a bit-field within the structure.
1204 @hook TARGET_ALIGN_ANON_BITFIELD
1206 @hook TARGET_NARROW_VOLATILE_BITFIELD
1208 @hook TARGET_MEMBER_TYPE_FORCES_BLK
1210 @defmac ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1211 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1212 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1213 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
1216 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1217 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1220 @defmac MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1221 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1222 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1223 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1224 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1225 (DImode)} is assumed.
1228 @defmac STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1229 If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
1230 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1231 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1232 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1233 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1234 having its mode specified.
1236 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1237 would most commonly define this macro if the
1238 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1242 @defmac STACK_SIZE_MODE
1243 If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
1244 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1245 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1247 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1248 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1249 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1252 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_CMP_RETURN_MODE
1254 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_SHIFT_COUNT_MODE
1256 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_WORD_MODE
1258 @defmac ROUND_TOWARDS_ZERO
1259 If defined, this macro should be true if the prevailing rounding
1260 mode is towards zero.
1262 Defining this macro only affects the way @file{libgcc.a} emulates
1263 floating-point arithmetic.
1265 Not defining this macro is equivalent to returning zero.
1268 @defmac LARGEST_EXPONENT_IS_NORMAL (@var{size})
1269 This macro should return true if floats with @var{size}
1270 bits do not have a NaN or infinity representation, but use the largest
1271 exponent for normal numbers instead.
1273 Defining this macro only affects the way @file{libgcc.a} emulates
1274 floating-point arithmetic.
1276 The default definition of this macro returns false for all sizes.
1279 @hook TARGET_MS_BITFIELD_LAYOUT_P
1281 @hook TARGET_DECIMAL_FLOAT_SUPPORTED_P
1283 @hook TARGET_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED_P
1285 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_TO_RTL_HOOK
1287 @hook TARGET_INSTANTIATE_DECLS
1289 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE
1292 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1294 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1295 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1296 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1297 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1299 @defmac INT_TYPE_SIZE
1300 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1301 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1304 @defmac SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1305 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1306 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1307 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1311 @defmac LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1312 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1313 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1316 @defmac ADA_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1317 On some machines, the size used for the Ada equivalent of the type
1318 @code{long} by a native Ada compiler differs from that used by C@. In
1319 that situation, define this macro to be a C expression to be used for
1320 the size of that type. If you don't define this, the default is the
1321 value of @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}.
1324 @defmac LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1325 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1326 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1327 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of this
1328 macro must be at least 64.
1331 @defmac CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1332 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1333 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1334 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1337 @defmac BOOL_TYPE_SIZE
1338 A C expression for the size in bits of the C++ type @code{bool} and
1339 C99 type @code{_Bool} on the target machine. If you don't define
1340 this, and you probably shouldn't, the default is @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}.
1343 @defmac FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1344 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1345 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1348 @defmac DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1349 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1350 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1354 @defmac LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1355 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1356 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1360 @defmac SHORT_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1361 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Fract} on
1362 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1363 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1366 @defmac FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1367 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Fract} on
1368 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1369 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1372 @defmac LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1373 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Fract} on
1374 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1375 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1378 @defmac LONG_LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1379 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Fract} on
1380 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1381 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1384 @defmac SHORT_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1385 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Accum} on
1386 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1387 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1390 @defmac ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1391 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Accum} on
1392 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1393 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1396 @defmac LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1397 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Accum} on
1398 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1399 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1402 @defmac LONG_LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1403 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Accum} on
1404 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1405 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 16}.
1408 @defmac LIBGCC2_LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1409 Define this macro if @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE} is not constant or
1410 if you want routines in @file{libgcc2.a} for a size other than
1411 @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}. If you don't define this, the
1412 default is @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1415 @defmac LIBGCC2_HAS_DF_MODE
1416 Define this macro if neither @code{DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE} nor
1417 @code{LIBGCC2_LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE} is
1418 @code{DFmode} but you want @code{DFmode} routines in @file{libgcc2.a}
1419 anyway. If you don't define this and either @code{DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1420 or @code{LIBGCC2_LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE} is 64 then the default is 1,
1424 @defmac LIBGCC2_HAS_XF_MODE
1425 Define this macro if @code{LIBGCC2_LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE} is not
1426 @code{XFmode} but you want @code{XFmode} routines in @file{libgcc2.a}
1427 anyway. If you don't define this and @code{LIBGCC2_LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1428 is 80 then the default is 1, otherwise it is 0.
1431 @defmac LIBGCC2_HAS_TF_MODE
1432 Define this macro if @code{LIBGCC2_LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE} is not
1433 @code{TFmode} but you want @code{TFmode} routines in @file{libgcc2.a}
1434 anyway. If you don't define this and @code{LIBGCC2_LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1435 is 128 then the default is 1, otherwise it is 0.
1438 @defmac LIBGCC2_GNU_PREFIX
1439 This macro corresponds to the @code{TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX} target
1440 hook and should be defined if that hook is overriden to be true. It
1441 causes function names in libgcc to be changed to use a @code{__gnu_}
1442 prefix for their name rather than the default @code{__}. A port which
1443 uses this macro should also arrange to use @file{t-gnu-prefix} in
1444 the libgcc @file{config.host}.
1451 Define these macros to be the size in bits of the mantissa of
1452 @code{SFmode}, @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} and @code{TFmode} values,
1453 if the defaults in @file{libgcc2.h} are inappropriate. By default,
1454 @code{FLT_MANT_DIG} is used for @code{SF_SIZE}, @code{LDBL_MANT_DIG}
1455 for @code{XF_SIZE} and @code{TF_SIZE}, and @code{DBL_MANT_DIG} or
1456 @code{LDBL_MANT_DIG} for @code{DF_SIZE} according to whether
1457 @code{DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE} or
1458 @code{LIBGCC2_LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE} is 64.
1461 @defmac TARGET_FLT_EVAL_METHOD
1462 A C expression for the value for @code{FLT_EVAL_METHOD} in @file{float.h},
1463 assuming, if applicable, that the floating-point control word is in its
1464 default state. If you do not define this macro the value of
1465 @code{FLT_EVAL_METHOD} will be zero.
1468 @defmac WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1469 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1470 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1471 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1472 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1476 @defmac DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1477 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1478 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1479 always override this default with the options @option{-fsigned-char}
1480 and @option{-funsigned-char}.
1483 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1486 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1487 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1488 contents of the string.
1490 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1491 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1492 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1493 of the data type names defined in the function
1494 @code{c_common_nodes_and_builtins} in the file @file{c-family/c-common.c}.
1495 You may not omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the
1496 compiler to crash on startup.
1498 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1503 GCC defines internal types (@code{sizetype}, @code{ssizetype},
1504 @code{bitsizetype} and @code{sbitsizetype}) for expressions
1505 dealing with size. This macro is a C expression for a string describing
1506 the name of the data type from which the precision of @code{sizetype}
1509 The string has the same restrictions as @code{SIZE_TYPE} string.
1511 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{SIZE_TYPE}.
1514 @defmac PTRDIFF_TYPE
1515 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1516 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1517 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1518 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1520 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1524 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1525 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1526 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1529 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1532 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1533 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1534 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1539 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to
1540 use for wide characters passed to @code{printf} and returned from
1541 @code{getwc}. The typedef name @code{wint_t} is defined using the
1542 contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1545 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"unsigned int"}.
1549 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1550 can represent any value of any standard or extended signed integer type.
1551 The typedef name @code{intmax_t} is defined using the contents of the
1552 string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1554 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1555 @code{"int"}, @code{"long int"}, or @code{"long long int"} that has as
1556 much precision as @code{long long int}.
1559 @defmac UINTMAX_TYPE
1560 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1561 can represent any value of any standard or extended unsigned integer
1562 type. The typedef name @code{uintmax_t} is defined using the contents
1563 of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1565 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1566 @code{"unsigned int"}, @code{"long unsigned int"}, or @code{"long long
1567 unsigned int"} that has as much precision as @code{long long unsigned
1571 @defmac SIG_ATOMIC_TYPE
1577 @defmacx UINT16_TYPE
1578 @defmacx UINT32_TYPE
1579 @defmacx UINT64_TYPE
1580 @defmacx INT_LEAST8_TYPE
1581 @defmacx INT_LEAST16_TYPE
1582 @defmacx INT_LEAST32_TYPE
1583 @defmacx INT_LEAST64_TYPE
1584 @defmacx UINT_LEAST8_TYPE
1585 @defmacx UINT_LEAST16_TYPE
1586 @defmacx UINT_LEAST32_TYPE
1587 @defmacx UINT_LEAST64_TYPE
1588 @defmacx INT_FAST8_TYPE
1589 @defmacx INT_FAST16_TYPE
1590 @defmacx INT_FAST32_TYPE
1591 @defmacx INT_FAST64_TYPE
1592 @defmacx UINT_FAST8_TYPE
1593 @defmacx UINT_FAST16_TYPE
1594 @defmacx UINT_FAST32_TYPE
1595 @defmacx UINT_FAST64_TYPE
1596 @defmacx INTPTR_TYPE
1597 @defmacx UINTPTR_TYPE
1598 C expressions for the standard types @code{sig_atomic_t},
1599 @code{int8_t}, @code{int16_t}, @code{int32_t}, @code{int64_t},
1600 @code{uint8_t}, @code{uint16_t}, @code{uint32_t}, @code{uint64_t},
1601 @code{int_least8_t}, @code{int_least16_t}, @code{int_least32_t},
1602 @code{int_least64_t}, @code{uint_least8_t}, @code{uint_least16_t},
1603 @code{uint_least32_t}, @code{uint_least64_t}, @code{int_fast8_t},
1604 @code{int_fast16_t}, @code{int_fast32_t}, @code{int_fast64_t},
1605 @code{uint_fast8_t}, @code{uint_fast16_t}, @code{uint_fast32_t},
1606 @code{uint_fast64_t}, @code{intptr_t}, and @code{uintptr_t}. See
1607 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1609 If any of these macros evaluates to a null pointer, the corresponding
1610 type is not supported; if GCC is configured to provide
1611 @code{<stdint.h>} in such a case, the header provided may not conform
1612 to C99, depending on the type in question. The defaults for all of
1613 these macros are null pointers.
1616 @defmac TARGET_PTRMEMFUNC_VBIT_LOCATION
1617 The C++ compiler represents a pointer-to-member-function with a struct
1624 ptrdiff_t vtable_index;
1631 The C++ compiler must use one bit to indicate whether the function that
1632 will be called through a pointer-to-member-function is virtual.
1633 Normally, we assume that the low-order bit of a function pointer must
1634 always be zero. Then, by ensuring that the vtable_index is odd, we can
1635 distinguish which variant of the union is in use. But, on some
1636 platforms function pointers can be odd, and so this doesn't work. In
1637 that case, we use the low-order bit of the @code{delta} field, and shift
1638 the remainder of the @code{delta} field to the left.
1640 GCC will automatically make the right selection about where to store
1641 this bit using the @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY} setting for your platform.
1642 However, some platforms such as ARM/Thumb have @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}
1643 set such that functions always start at even addresses, but the lowest
1644 bit of pointers to functions indicate whether the function at that
1645 address is in ARM or Thumb mode. If this is the case of your
1646 architecture, you should define this macro to
1647 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_delta}.
1649 In general, you should not have to define this macro. On architectures
1650 in which function addresses are always even, according to
1651 @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}, GCC will automatically define this macro to
1652 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_pfn}.
1655 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS
1656 Normally, the C++ compiler uses function pointers in vtables. This
1657 macro allows the target to change to use ``function descriptors''
1658 instead. Function descriptors are found on targets for whom a
1659 function pointer is actually a small data structure. Normally the
1660 data structure consists of the actual code address plus a data
1661 pointer to which the function's data is relative.
1663 If vtables are used, the value of this macro should be the number
1664 of words that the function descriptor occupies.
1667 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN
1668 By default, the vtable entries are void pointers, the so the alignment
1669 is the same as pointer alignment. The value of this macro specifies
1670 the alignment of the vtable entry in bits. It should be defined only
1671 when special alignment is necessary. */
1674 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_DATA_ENTRY_DISTANCE
1675 There are a few non-descriptor entries in the vtable at offsets below
1676 zero. If these entries must be padded (say, to preserve the alignment
1677 specified by @code{TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN}), set this to the number
1678 of words in each data entry.
1682 @section Register Usage
1683 @cindex register usage
1685 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1686 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1688 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1689 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1690 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1691 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1692 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1695 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1696 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1697 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1698 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1699 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1702 @node Register Basics
1703 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1705 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1706 Registers have various characteristics.
1708 @defmac FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1709 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1710 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1711 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1712 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1715 @defmac FIXED_REGISTERS
1716 @cindex fixed register
1717 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1718 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1719 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1720 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1721 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1722 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1723 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1725 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1726 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1727 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1729 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1730 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1731 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1732 the user with the command options @option{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1733 @option{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @option{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1736 @defmac CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1737 @cindex call-used register
1738 @cindex call-clobbered register
1739 @cindex call-saved register
1740 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1741 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1742 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1743 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1746 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1747 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1748 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1751 @defmac CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS
1752 @cindex call-used register
1753 @cindex call-clobbered register
1754 @cindex call-saved register
1755 Like @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} except this macro doesn't require
1756 that the entire set of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} be included.
1757 (@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} must be a superset of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}).
1758 This macro is optional. If not specified, it defaults to the value
1759 of @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}.
1762 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1763 @cindex call-used register
1764 @cindex call-clobbered register
1765 @cindex call-saved register
1766 A C expression that is nonzero if it is not permissible to store a
1767 value of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} across a
1768 call without some part of it being clobbered. For most machines this
1769 macro need not be defined. It is only required for machines that do not
1770 preserve the entire contents of a register across a call.
1774 @findex call_used_regs
1777 @findex reg_class_contents
1778 @hook TARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1780 @defmac INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1781 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1782 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1783 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1784 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1788 @defmac OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1789 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1790 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1791 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1792 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1796 @defmac LOCAL_REGNO (@var{regno})
1797 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1798 expression returns true if the register is call-saved but is in the
1799 register window. Unlike most call-saved registers, such registers
1800 need not be explicitly restored on function exit or during non-local
1805 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1806 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1809 @node Allocation Order
1810 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1811 @cindex order of register allocation
1812 @cindex register allocation order
1814 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1815 Registers are allocated in order.
1817 @defmac REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1818 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1819 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1820 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1822 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1823 (all else being equal).
1825 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1826 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1827 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1828 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1829 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1832 @defmac ADJUST_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1833 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1834 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1836 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1837 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1838 register; and so on.
1840 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1841 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1843 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1846 @defmac HONOR_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1847 Normally, IRA tries to estimate the costs for saving a register in the
1848 prologue and restoring it in the epilogue. This discourages it from
1849 using call-saved registers. If a machine wants to ensure that IRA
1850 allocates registers in the order given by REG_ALLOC_ORDER even if some
1851 call-saved registers appear earlier than call-used ones, then define this
1852 macro as a C expression to nonzero. Default is 0.
1855 @defmac IRA_HARD_REGNO_ADD_COST_MULTIPLIER (@var{regno})
1856 In some case register allocation order is not enough for the
1857 Integrated Register Allocator (@acronym{IRA}) to generate a good code.
1858 If this macro is defined, it should return a floating point value
1859 based on @var{regno}. The cost of using @var{regno} for a pseudo will
1860 be increased by approximately the pseudo's usage frequency times the
1861 value returned by this macro. Not defining this macro is equivalent
1862 to having it always return @code{0.0}.
1864 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1867 @node Values in Registers
1868 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1870 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1871 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1872 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1874 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1875 A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
1876 at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
1877 @var{mode}. This macro must never return zero, even if a register
1878 cannot hold the requested mode - indicate that with HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1879 and/or CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS instead.
1881 On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
1882 definition of this macro is
1885 #define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE) \
1886 ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) \
1891 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1892 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode @var{mode}, stored
1893 in memory, ends with padding that causes it to take up more space than
1894 in registers starting at register number @var{regno} (as determined by
1895 multiplying GCC's notion of the size of the register when containing
1896 this mode by the number of registers returned by
1897 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}). By default this is zero.
1899 For example, if a floating-point value is stored in three 32-bit
1900 registers but takes up 128 bits in memory, then this would be
1903 This macros only needs to be defined if there are cases where
1904 @code{subreg_get_info}
1905 would otherwise wrongly determine that a @code{subreg} can be
1906 represented by an offset to the register number, when in fact such a
1907 @code{subreg} would contain some of the padding not stored in
1908 registers and so not be representable.
1911 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_WITH_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1912 For values of @var{regno} and @var{mode} for which
1913 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING} returns nonzero, a C expression
1914 returning the greater number of registers required to hold the value
1915 including any padding. In the example above, the value would be four.
1918 @defmac REGMODE_NATURAL_SIZE (@var{mode})
1919 Define this macro if the natural size of registers that hold values
1920 of mode @var{mode} is not the word size. It is a C expression that
1921 should give the natural size in bytes for the specified mode. It is
1922 used by the register allocator to try to optimize its results. This
1923 happens for example on SPARC 64-bit where the natural size of
1924 floating-point registers is still 32-bit.
1927 @defmac HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1928 A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
1929 of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
1930 registers starting with that one). For a machine where all registers
1931 are equivalent, a suitable definition is
1934 #define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
1937 You need not include code to check for the numbers of fixed registers,
1938 because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always occupied.
1940 @cindex register pairs
1941 On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
1942 register pairs. You can implement that by defining this macro to reject
1943 odd register numbers for such modes.
1945 The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
1946 @samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
1947 register and other hard register in the same class and that moving a
1948 value into the register and back out not alter it.
1950 Since the same instruction used to move @code{word_mode} will work for
1951 all narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
1952 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
1953 you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this. This
1954 is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
1955 and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
1958 Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
1959 Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
1960 in floating point registers. This is not true. Any registers that
1961 can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
1962 mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
1963 registers. Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
1965 On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
1966 modes may not go in floating registers. This is true if the floating
1967 registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
1968 non-floating value there would garble it. In this case,
1969 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
1970 floating registers. But if the floating registers do not automatically
1971 normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
1972 unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
1973 register, so you can define this macro to say so.
1975 The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
1976 they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
1977 instructions. However, this is of no concern to
1978 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}. You handle it by writing the proper
1979 constraints for those instructions.
1981 On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
1982 so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
1983 register if floating point arithmetic is not being done. As long as the
1984 floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
1985 be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
1988 @defmac HARD_REGNO_RENAME_OK (@var{from}, @var{to})
1989 A C expression that is nonzero if it is OK to rename a hard register
1990 @var{from} to another hard register @var{to}.
1992 One common use of this macro is to prevent renaming of a register to
1993 another register that is not saved by a prologue in an interrupt
1996 The default is always nonzero.
1999 @defmac MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
2000 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode
2001 @var{mode1} is accessible in mode @var{mode2} without copying.
2003 If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
2004 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are always the same for
2005 any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})}
2006 should be nonzero. If they differ for any @var{r}, you should define
2007 this macro to return zero unless some other mechanism ensures the
2008 accessibility of the value in a narrower mode.
2010 You should define this macro to return nonzero in as many cases as
2011 possible since doing so will allow GCC to perform better register
2015 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_SCRATCH_OK
2017 @defmac AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
2018 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
2019 registers. You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
2020 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
2023 @node Leaf Functions
2024 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
2026 @cindex leaf functions
2027 @cindex functions, leaf
2028 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
2029 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
2030 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
2031 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
2034 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
2035 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
2036 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
2037 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
2038 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
2041 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
2042 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
2043 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
2046 @defmac LEAF_REGISTERS
2047 Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
2048 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
2051 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
2052 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
2053 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
2054 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
2057 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
2058 the treatment of leaf functions.
2061 @defmac LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
2062 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
2063 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
2065 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
2066 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield @minus{}1, which
2067 will cause the compiler to abort.
2069 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
2070 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
2074 @findex current_function_is_leaf
2075 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
2076 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
2077 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must usually treat leaf functions
2078 specially. They can test the C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
2079 which is nonzero for leaf functions. @code{current_function_is_leaf} is
2080 set prior to local register allocation and is valid for the remaining
2081 compiler passes. They can also test the C variable
2082 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for leaf
2083 functions which only use leaf registers.
2084 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after all passes
2085 that modify the instructions have been run and is only useful if
2086 @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
2087 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
2088 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
2090 @node Stack Registers
2091 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
2093 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
2094 ``registers'' form a stack. Stack registers are normally written by
2095 pushing onto the stack, and are numbered relative to the top of the
2098 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
2099 they must be consecutively numbered. Furthermore, the existing
2100 support for stack-like registers is specific to the 80387 floating
2101 point coprocessor. If you have a new architecture that uses
2102 stack-like registers, you will need to do substantial work on
2103 @file{reg-stack.c} and write your machine description to cooperate
2104 with it, as well as defining these macros.
2107 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
2110 @defmac STACK_REG_COVER_CLASS
2111 This is a cover class containing the stack registers. Define this if
2112 the machine has any stack-like registers.
2115 @defmac FIRST_STACK_REG
2116 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
2120 @defmac LAST_STACK_REG
2121 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
2125 @node Register Classes
2126 @section Register Classes
2127 @cindex register class definitions
2128 @cindex class definitions, register
2130 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
2131 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
2132 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
2133 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
2135 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
2136 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
2137 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
2141 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
2142 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
2143 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
2144 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
2146 @findex GENERAL_REGS
2147 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
2148 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
2149 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
2150 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
2153 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
2154 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
2156 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
2157 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
2158 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
2159 them in operand constraints.
2161 You must define the narrowest register classes for allocatable
2162 registers, so that each class either has no subclasses, or that for
2163 some mode, the move cost between registers within the class is
2164 cheaper than moving a register in the class to or from memory
2167 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
2168 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
2169 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
2170 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
2171 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code,
2172 or even internal compiler errors when reload cannot find a register in the
2173 class computed via @code{reg_class_subunion}.
2175 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
2176 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
2177 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
2180 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
2181 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
2182 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
2183 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
2184 specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
2186 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
2187 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
2188 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
2189 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
2190 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
2191 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
2192 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
2193 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
2194 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
2196 @deftp {Data type} {enum reg_class}
2197 An enumerated type that must be defined with all the register class names
2198 as enumerated values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
2199 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumerated value,
2200 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
2201 tells how many classes there are.
2203 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
2204 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
2205 in many of the tables described below.
2208 @defmac N_REG_CLASSES
2209 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
2212 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
2216 @defmac REG_CLASS_NAMES
2217 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
2218 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
2221 @defmac REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
2222 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
2223 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
2224 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
2225 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
2227 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
2228 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
2229 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
2230 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
2231 In this situation, the first integer in each sub-initializer corresponds to
2232 registers 0 through 31, the second integer to registers 32 through 63, and
2236 @defmac REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
2237 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
2238 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
2239 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
2243 @defmac BASE_REG_CLASS
2244 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2245 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
2246 which is the register value plus a displacement.
2249 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2250 This is a variation of the @code{BASE_REG_CLASS} macro which allows
2251 the selection of a base register in a mode dependent manner. If
2252 @var{mode} is VOIDmode then it should return the same value as
2253 @code{BASE_REG_CLASS}.
2256 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2257 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2258 base register must belong in order to be used in a base plus index
2259 register address. You should define this macro if base plus index
2260 addresses have different requirements than other base register uses.
2263 @defmac MODE_CODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2264 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2265 base register for a memory reference in mode @var{mode} to address
2266 space @var{address_space} must belong. @var{outer_code} and @var{index_code}
2267 define the context in which the base register occurs. @var{outer_code} is
2268 the code of the immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} for the top level
2269 of an address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2270 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the corresponding
2271 index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS}; @code{SCRATCH} otherwise.
2274 @defmac INDEX_REG_CLASS
2275 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2276 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
2277 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
2278 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
2281 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
2282 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2283 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses.
2286 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2287 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
2288 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
2289 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
2290 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
2291 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
2292 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for
2293 addresses that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an
2294 @code{address_operand}.
2297 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_REG_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2298 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is suitable for
2299 use as a base register in base plus index operand addresses, accessing
2300 memory in mode @var{mode}. It may be either a suitable hard register or a
2301 pseudo register that has been allocated such a hard register. You should
2302 define this macro if base plus index addresses have different requirements
2303 than other base register uses.
2305 Use of this macro is deprecated; please use the more general
2306 @code{REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
2309 @defmac REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2310 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2311 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses, accessing
2312 memory in mode @var{mode} in address space @var{address_space}.
2313 This is similar to @code{REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except
2314 that that expression may examine the context in which the register
2315 appears in the memory reference. @var{outer_code} is the code of the
2316 immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} if at the top level of the
2317 address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2318 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the
2319 corresponding index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS};
2320 @code{SCRATCH} otherwise. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for addresses
2321 that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an @code{address_operand}.
2324 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
2325 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2326 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
2327 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
2328 allocated such a hard register.
2330 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
2331 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
2332 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
2333 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
2334 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
2335 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
2336 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
2337 only if neither labeling works.
2340 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RENAME_CLASS
2342 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
2344 @defmac PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
2345 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2346 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
2347 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
2348 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
2352 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
2355 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
2356 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
2357 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
2358 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
2359 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
2361 One case where @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} must not return
2362 @var{class} is if @var{x} is a legitimate constant which cannot be
2363 loaded into some register class. By returning @code{NO_REGS} you can
2364 force @var{x} into a memory location. For example, rs6000 can load
2365 immediate values into general-purpose registers, but does not have an
2366 instruction for loading an immediate value into a floating-point
2367 register, so @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} returns @code{NO_REGS} when
2368 @var{x} is a floating-point constant. If the constant can't be loaded
2369 into any kind of register, code generation will be better if
2370 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P} makes the constant illegitimate instead
2371 of using @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}.
2373 If an insn has pseudos in it after register allocation, reload will go
2374 through the alternatives and call repeatedly @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}
2375 to find the best one. Returning @code{NO_REGS}, in this case, makes
2376 reload add a @code{!} in front of the constraint: the x86 back-end uses
2377 this feature to discourage usage of 387 registers when math is done in
2378 the SSE registers (and vice versa).
2381 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
2383 @defmac LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
2384 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2385 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
2386 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
2389 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
2390 there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
2392 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
2395 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
2396 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
2399 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD
2401 @defmac SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2402 @defmacx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2403 @defmacx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2404 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
2405 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD} instead.
2407 These are obsolete macros, replaced by the @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD}
2408 target hook. Older ports still define these macros to indicate to the
2409 reload phase that it may
2410 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
2411 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
2412 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
2413 you were supposed to define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
2414 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
2415 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
2417 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
2418 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
2419 was supposed to be defined be defined to return the largest register
2420 class required. If the
2421 requirements for input and output reloads were the same, the macro
2422 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should have been used instead of defining both
2425 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
2426 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
2427 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
2428 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
2429 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
2431 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
2432 intermediate register), you were supposed to define patterns for
2433 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
2434 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which were normally
2435 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
2436 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
2439 These patterns need constraints for the reload register and scratch
2441 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
2442 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
2443 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
2444 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
2445 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
2447 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2448 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2449 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return @minus{}1 if the pseudo is
2450 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2452 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
2453 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
2454 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
2455 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
2456 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as an
2457 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
2461 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
2462 Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
2463 to some other registers without using memory. Define this macro on
2464 those machines to be a C expression that is nonzero if objects of mode
2465 @var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
2466 class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
2467 and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
2469 Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero.
2472 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2473 Normally when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2474 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2475 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2476 defined by this macro.
2478 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2479 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2482 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (@var{mode})
2483 When the compiler needs a secondary memory location to copy between two
2484 registers of mode @var{mode}, it normally allocates sufficient memory to
2485 hold a quantity of @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits and performs the store and
2486 load operations in a mode that many bits wide and whose class is the
2487 same as that of @var{mode}.
2489 This is right thing to do on most machines because it ensures that all
2490 bits of the register are copied and prevents accesses to the registers
2491 in a narrower mode, which some machines prohibit for floating-point
2494 However, this default behavior is not correct on some machines, such as
2495 the DEC Alpha, that store short integers in floating-point registers
2496 differently than in integer registers. On those machines, the default
2497 widening will not work correctly and you must define this macro to
2498 suppress that widening in some cases. See the file @file{alpha.h} for
2501 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2502 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} or if widening @var{mode} to a mode that
2503 is @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits wide is correct for your machine.
2506 @hook TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2508 @hook TARGET_CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2510 @defmac CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2511 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2512 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2514 This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2515 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2516 should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2517 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2519 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2523 @defmac CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS (@var{from}, @var{to}, @var{class})
2524 If defined, a C expression that returns nonzero for a @var{class} for which
2525 a change from mode @var{from} to mode @var{to} is invalid.
2527 For the example, loading 32-bit integer or floating-point objects into
2528 floating-point registers on the Alpha extends them to 64 bits.
2529 Therefore loading a 64-bit object and then storing it as a 32-bit object
2530 does not store the low-order 32 bits, as would be the case for a normal
2531 register. Therefore, @file{alpha.h} defines @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS}
2535 #define CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS(FROM, TO, CLASS) \
2536 (GET_MODE_SIZE (FROM) != GET_MODE_SIZE (TO) \
2537 ? reg_classes_intersect_p (FLOAT_REGS, (CLASS)) : 0)
2543 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_PRIORITY
2545 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_USAGE_LEVELING_P
2547 @hook TARGET_DIFFERENT_ADDR_DISPLACEMENT_P
2549 @hook TARGET_SPILL_CLASS
2551 @hook TARGET_CSTORE_MODE
2553 @node Stack and Calling
2554 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2555 @cindex calling conventions
2557 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2558 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2562 * Exception Handling::
2567 * Register Arguments::
2569 * Aggregate Return::
2574 * Stack Smashing Protection::
2575 * Miscellaneous Register Hooks::
2579 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2580 @cindex stack frame layout
2581 @cindex frame layout
2583 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2584 Here is the basic stack layout.
2586 @defmac STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2587 Define this macro if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2588 pointer to a smaller address.
2590 When we say, ``define this macro if @dots{}'', it means that the
2591 compiler checks this macro only with @code{#ifdef} so the precise
2592 definition used does not matter.
2595 @defmac STACK_PUSH_CODE
2596 This macro defines the operation used when something is pushed
2597 on the stack. In RTL, a push operation will be
2598 @code{(set (mem (STACK_PUSH_CODE (reg sp))) @dots{})}
2600 The choices are @code{PRE_DEC}, @code{POST_DEC}, @code{PRE_INC},
2601 and @code{POST_INC}. Which of these is correct depends on
2602 the stack direction and on whether the stack pointer points
2603 to the last item on the stack or whether it points to the
2604 space for the next item on the stack.
2606 The default is @code{PRE_DEC} when @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is
2607 defined, which is almost always right, and @code{PRE_INC} otherwise,
2608 which is often wrong.
2611 @defmac FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2612 Define this macro to nonzero value if the addresses of local variable slots
2613 are at negative offsets from the frame pointer.
2616 @defmac ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2617 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2618 addresses on the stack.
2621 @defmac STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2622 Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
2624 If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
2625 subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2626 Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
2627 value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2628 @c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
2629 @c rid of an overfull. --mew 2feb93
2632 @defmac STACK_ALIGNMENT_NEEDED
2633 Define to zero to disable final alignment of the stack during reload.
2634 The nonzero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2636 On ports where @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET} is nonzero or where there
2637 is a register save block following the local block that doesn't require
2638 alignment to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, it may be beneficial to disable
2639 stack alignment and do it in the backend.
2642 @defmac STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2643 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2644 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2645 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2647 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2648 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2651 @defmac FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2652 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2653 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2656 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2657 the first argument's address.
2660 @defmac STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2661 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2662 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2664 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2665 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2666 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2669 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_ADDRESS_RTX
2670 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address of the initial
2671 stack frame. This address is passed to @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and
2672 @code{DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS}. If you don't define this macro, a reasonable
2673 default value will be used. Define this macro in order to make frame pointer
2674 elimination work in the presence of @code{__builtin_frame_address (count)} and
2675 @code{__builtin_return_address (count)} for @code{count} not equal to zero.
2678 @defmac DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2679 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2680 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2681 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2684 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2685 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2686 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2689 @defmac SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2690 If defined, a C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2691 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2692 on the SPARC, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2693 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2697 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2699 @defmac FRAME_ADDR_RTX (@var{frameaddr})
2700 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the frame
2701 address for the current frame. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer
2702 of the current frame. This is used for __builtin_frame_address.
2703 You need only define this macro if the frame address is not the same
2704 as the frame pointer. Most machines do not need to define it.
2707 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2708 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2709 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2710 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2711 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2712 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is defined.
2714 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2715 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is no way to
2716 determine the return address of other frames.
2719 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2720 Define this if the return address of a particular stack frame is accessed
2721 from the frame pointer of the previous stack frame.
2724 @defmac INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2725 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2726 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2727 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2728 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2731 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2732 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2734 If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
2735 @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
2738 @defmac DWARF_ALT_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN
2739 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 column
2740 number that may be used as an alternative return column. The column
2741 must not correspond to any gcc hard register (that is, it must not
2742 be in the range of @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM}).
2744 This macro can be useful if @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} is set to a
2745 general register, but an alternative column needs to be used for signal
2746 frames. Some targets have also used different frame return columns
2750 @defmac DWARF_ZERO_REG
2751 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 register
2752 number that is considered to always have the value zero. This should
2753 only be defined if the target has an architected zero register, and
2754 someone decided it was a good idea to use that register number to
2755 terminate the stack backtrace. New ports should avoid this.
2758 @hook TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC
2760 @defmac INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2761 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2762 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2763 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2764 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2765 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2767 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2768 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2771 @defmac ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2772 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2773 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2774 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2775 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2776 during virtual register instantiation.
2778 The default value for this macro is
2779 @code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl) + crtl->args.pretend_args_size},
2780 which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
2781 immediately before the stack frame. Note that this is not the case on
2782 some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
2783 and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
2785 You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
2786 want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
2790 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2791 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2792 in bytes from the frame pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa).
2793 The final value should coincide with that calculated by
2794 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}.
2796 Normally the CFA is calculated as an offset from the argument pointer,
2797 via @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}, but if the argument pointer is
2798 variable due to the ABI, this may not be possible. If this macro is
2799 defined, it implies that the virtual register instantiation should be
2800 based on the frame pointer instead of the argument pointer. Only one
2801 of @code{FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET} and @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}
2805 @defmac CFA_FRAME_BASE_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2806 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2807 in bytes from the canonical frame address (cfa) to the frame base used
2808 in DWARF 2 debug information. The default is zero. A different value
2809 may reduce the size of debug information on some ports.
2812 @node Exception Handling
2813 @subsection Exception Handling Support
2814 @cindex exception handling
2816 @defmac EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (@var{N})
2817 A C expression whose value is the @var{N}th register number used for
2818 data by exception handlers, or @code{INVALID_REGNUM} if fewer than
2819 @var{N} registers are usable.
2821 The exception handling library routines communicate with the exception
2822 handlers via a set of agreed upon registers. Ideally these registers
2823 should be call-clobbered; it is possible to use call-saved registers,
2824 but may negatively impact code size. The target must support at least
2825 2 data registers, but should define 4 if there are enough free registers.
2827 You must define this macro if you want to support call frame exception
2828 handling like that provided by DWARF 2.
2831 @defmac EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX
2832 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2833 to store a stack adjustment to be applied before function return.
2834 This is used to unwind the stack to an exception handler's call frame.
2835 It will be assigned zero on code paths that return normally.
2837 Typically this is a call-clobbered hard register that is otherwise
2838 untouched by the epilogue, but could also be a stack slot.
2840 Do not define this macro if the stack pointer is saved and restored
2841 by the regular prolog and epilog code in the call frame itself; in
2842 this case, the exception handling library routines will update the
2843 stack location to be restored in place. Otherwise, you must define
2844 this macro if you want to support call frame exception handling like
2845 that provided by DWARF 2.
2848 @defmac EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX
2849 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2850 to store the address of an exception handler to which we should
2851 return. It will not be assigned on code paths that return normally.
2853 Typically this is the location in the call frame at which the normal
2854 return address is stored. For targets that return by popping an
2855 address off the stack, this might be a memory address just below
2856 the @emph{target} call frame rather than inside the current call
2857 frame. If defined, @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX} will have already
2858 been assigned, so it may be used to calculate the location of the
2861 Some targets have more complex requirements than storing to an
2862 address calculable during initial code generation. In that case
2863 the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern should be used instead.
2865 If you want to support call frame exception handling, you must
2866 define either this macro or the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern.
2869 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_OFFSET
2870 If defined, an integer-valued C expression for which rtl will be generated
2871 to add it to the exception handler address before it is searched in the
2872 exception handling tables, and to subtract it again from the address before
2873 using it to return to the exception handler.
2876 @defmac ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT (@var{code}, @var{global})
2877 This macro chooses the encoding of pointers embedded in the exception
2878 handling sections. If at all possible, this should be defined such
2879 that the exception handling section will not require dynamic relocations,
2880 and so may be read-only.
2882 @var{code} is 0 for data, 1 for code labels, 2 for function pointers.
2883 @var{global} is true if the symbol may be affected by dynamic relocations.
2884 The macro should return a combination of the @code{DW_EH_PE_*} defines
2885 as found in @file{dwarf2.h}.
2887 If this macro is not defined, pointers will not be encoded but
2888 represented directly.
2891 @defmac ASM_MAYBE_OUTPUT_ENCODED_ADDR_RTX (@var{file}, @var{encoding}, @var{size}, @var{addr}, @var{done})
2892 This macro allows the target to emit whatever special magic is required
2893 to represent the encoding chosen by @code{ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT}.
2894 Generic code takes care of pc-relative and indirect encodings; this must
2895 be defined if the target uses text-relative or data-relative encodings.
2897 This is a C statement that branches to @var{done} if the format was
2898 handled. @var{encoding} is the format chosen, @var{size} is the number
2899 of bytes that the format occupies, @var{addr} is the @code{SYMBOL_REF}
2903 @defmac MD_FALLBACK_FRAME_STATE_FOR (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2904 This macro allows the target to add CPU and operating system specific
2905 code to the call-frame unwinder for use when there is no unwind data
2906 available. The most common reason to implement this macro is to unwind
2907 through signal frames.
2909 This macro is called from @code{uw_frame_state_for} in
2910 @file{unwind-dw2.c}, @file{unwind-dw2-xtensa.c} and
2911 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2912 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{context->ra}
2913 for the address of the code being executed and @code{context->cfa} for
2914 the stack pointer value. If the frame can be decoded, the register
2915 save addresses should be updated in @var{fs} and the macro should
2916 evaluate to @code{_URC_NO_REASON}. If the frame cannot be decoded,
2917 the macro should evaluate to @code{_URC_END_OF_STACK}.
2919 For proper signal handling in Java this macro is accompanied by
2920 @code{MAKE_THROW_FRAME}, defined in @file{libjava/include/*-signal.h} headers.
2923 @defmac MD_HANDLE_UNWABI (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2924 This macro allows the target to add operating system specific code to the
2925 call-frame unwinder to handle the IA-64 @code{.unwabi} unwinding directive,
2926 usually used for signal or interrupt frames.
2928 This macro is called from @code{uw_update_context} in libgcc's
2929 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2930 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{fs->unwabi}
2931 for the abi and context in the @code{.unwabi} directive. If the
2932 @code{.unwabi} directive can be handled, the register save addresses should
2933 be updated in @var{fs}.
2936 @defmac TARGET_USES_WEAK_UNWIND_INFO
2937 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target requires unwind
2938 info to be given comdat linkage. Define it to be @code{1} if comdat
2939 linkage is necessary. The default is @code{0}.
2942 @node Stack Checking
2943 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2945 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of the
2946 stack, if the option @option{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of
2951 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2952 will assume that you have arranged for full stack checking to be done
2953 at appropriate places in the configuration files. GCC will not do
2954 other special processing.
2957 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and the value of the
2958 @code{STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC will assume
2959 that you have arranged for static stack checking (checking of the
2960 static stack frame of functions) to be done at appropriate places
2961 in the configuration files. GCC will only emit code to do dynamic
2962 stack checking (checking on dynamic stack allocations) using the third
2966 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2967 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2970 If neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined,
2971 GCC will change its allocation strategy for large objects if the option
2972 @option{-fstack-check} is specified: they will always be allocated
2973 dynamically if their size exceeds @code{STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE} bytes.
2975 @defmac STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2976 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2977 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2978 is required by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to do stack
2979 checking in some more efficient way than the generic approach. The default
2980 value of this macro is zero.
2983 @defmac STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN
2984 A nonzero value if static stack checking is done by the configuration files
2985 in a machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if you would
2986 like to do static stack checking in some more efficient way than the generic
2987 approach. The default value of this macro is zero.
2990 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL_EXP
2991 An integer specifying the interval at which GCC must generate stack probe
2992 instructions, defined as 2 raised to this integer. You will normally
2993 define this macro so that the interval be no larger than the size of
2994 the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The default value
2995 of 12 (4096-byte interval) is suitable for most systems.
2998 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MOVING_SP
2999 An integer which is nonzero if GCC should move the stack pointer page by page
3000 when doing probes. This can be necessary on systems where the stack pointer
3001 contains the bottom address of the memory area accessible to the executing
3002 thread at any point in time. In this situation an alternate signal stack
3003 is required in order to be able to recover from a stack overflow. The
3004 default value of this macro is zero.
3007 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
3008 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow, for
3009 languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of 75 words
3010 with the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism and
3011 8192 bytes with other exception handling mechanisms should be adequate for
3015 The following macros are relevant only if neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
3016 nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined; you can omit them altogether
3017 in the opposite case.
3019 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
3020 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
3021 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
3022 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
3023 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
3024 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
3025 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
3028 @defmac STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
3029 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
3030 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
3031 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
3032 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
3033 use the default of four words.
3036 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
3037 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
3038 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
3039 @option{-fstack-check}.
3040 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
3041 normally not need to override that default.
3045 @node Frame Registers
3046 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
3048 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3049 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
3051 @defmac STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
3052 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
3053 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
3054 the hardware determines which register this is.
3057 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3058 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
3059 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
3060 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
3061 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
3064 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3065 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
3066 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
3067 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
3068 between these two locations). On those machines, define
3069 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
3070 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
3071 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
3072 used for the frame pointer.
3074 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
3075 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
3076 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
3077 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
3078 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
3079 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
3080 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
3082 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
3083 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
3086 @defmac ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
3087 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
3088 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
3089 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
3090 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
3091 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
3092 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
3093 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
3094 (@pxref{Elimination}).
3097 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
3098 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3099 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{frame_pointer_rtx} should be
3100 the same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3101 == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3102 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3105 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_ARG_POINTER
3106 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3107 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{arg_pointer_rtx} should be the
3108 same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM ==
3109 ARG_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3110 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3113 @defmac RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
3114 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
3115 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
3116 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
3117 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
3118 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
3119 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
3121 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
3122 address from the stack.
3125 @defmac STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
3126 @defmacx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
3127 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
3128 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
3129 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
3130 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
3131 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
3134 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
3136 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
3137 defined; instead, the @code{TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN} hook should be used.
3140 @hook TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN
3142 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3143 This macro specifies the maximum number of hard registers that can be
3144 saved in a call frame. This is used to size data structures used in
3145 DWARF2 exception handling.
3147 Prior to GCC 3.0, this macro was needed in order to establish a stable
3148 exception handling ABI in the face of adding new hard registers for ISA
3149 extensions. In GCC 3.0 and later, the EH ABI is insulated from changes
3150 in the number of hard registers. Nevertheless, this macro can still be
3151 used to reduce the runtime memory requirements of the exception handling
3152 routines, which can be substantial if the ISA contains a lot of
3153 registers that are not call-saved.
3155 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3156 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
3159 @defmac PRE_GCC3_DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3161 This macro is similar to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}, but is provided
3162 for backward compatibility in pre GCC 3.0 compiled code.
3164 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3165 @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}.
3168 @defmac DWARF_REG_TO_UNWIND_COLUMN (@var{regno})
3170 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3171 is different than the internal representation for unwind column.
3172 Given a dwarf register, this macro should return the internal unwind
3173 column number to use instead.
3175 See the PowerPC's SPE target for an example.
3178 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (@var{regno})
3180 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3181 used in .eh_frame or .debug_frame is different from that used in other
3182 debug info sections. Given a GCC hard register number, this macro
3183 should return the .eh_frame register number. The default is
3184 @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})}.
3188 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_REG_OUT (@var{regno}, @var{for_eh})
3190 Define this macro to map register numbers held in the call frame info
3191 that GCC has collected using @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM} to those that
3192 should be output in .debug_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is zero) and
3193 .eh_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is nonzero). The default is to
3194 return @code{@var{regno}}.
3198 @defmac REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3200 Define this macro if the target stores register values as
3201 @code{_Unwind_Word} type in unwind context. It should be defined if
3202 target register size is larger than the size of @code{void *}. The
3203 default is to store register values as @code{void *} type.
3207 @defmac ASSUME_EXTENDED_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3209 Define this macro to be 1 if the target always uses extended unwind
3210 context with version, args_size and by_value fields. If it is undefined,
3211 it will be defined to 1 when @code{REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT} is
3212 defined and 0 otherwise.
3217 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
3219 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3220 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
3222 @hook TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
3224 @findex get_frame_size
3225 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET (@var{depth-var})
3226 A C statement to store in the variable @var{depth-var} the difference
3227 between the frame pointer and the stack pointer values immediately after
3228 the function prologue. The value would be computed from information
3229 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
3230 registers @code{regs_ever_live} and @code{call_used_regs}.
3232 If @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is defined, this macro will be not be used and
3233 need not be defined. Otherwise, it must be defined even if
3234 @code{TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} always returns true; in that
3235 case, you may set @var{depth-var} to anything.
3238 @defmac ELIMINABLE_REGS
3239 If defined, this macro specifies a table of register pairs used to
3240 eliminate unneeded registers that point into the stack frame. If it is not
3241 defined, the only elimination attempted by the compiler is to replace
3242 references to the frame pointer with references to the stack pointer.
3244 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
3245 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
3247 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
3248 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
3249 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
3250 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
3251 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
3253 In this case, you might specify:
3255 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
3256 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3257 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3258 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
3261 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
3262 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
3265 @hook TARGET_CAN_ELIMINATE
3267 @defmac INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
3268 This macro is similar to @code{INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET}. It
3269 specifies the initial difference between the specified pair of
3270 registers. This macro must be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is
3274 @node Stack Arguments
3275 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
3276 @cindex arguments on stack
3277 @cindex stack arguments
3279 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
3280 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
3281 control passing certain arguments in registers.
3283 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
3286 A C expression. If nonzero, push insns will be used to pass
3288 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, set it to zero.
3289 That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
3290 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
3291 it. When @code{PUSH_ARGS} is nonzero, @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} must be defined too.
3294 @defmac PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3295 A C expression. If nonzero, function arguments will be evaluated from
3296 last to first, rather than from first to last. If this macro is not
3297 defined, it defaults to @code{PUSH_ARGS} on targets where the stack
3298 and args grow in opposite directions, and 0 otherwise.
3301 @defmac PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
3302 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
3303 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
3305 On some machines, the definition
3308 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
3312 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
3313 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
3314 alignment. Then the definition should be
3317 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
3320 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
3323 @findex outgoing_args_size
3324 @findex crtl->outgoing_args_size
3325 @defmac ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3326 A C expression. If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
3327 will be computed and placed into
3328 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
3329 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
3330 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
3332 Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
3336 @defmac REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3337 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
3338 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
3341 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
3342 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
3343 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
3344 The argument @var{fndecl} can be the FUNCTION_DECL, or the type itself
3347 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
3348 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
3351 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
3352 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
3354 @defmac INCOMING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3355 Like @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, but for incoming register arguments.
3356 Define this macro if space guaranteed when compiling a function body
3357 is different to space required when making a call, a situation that
3358 can arise with K&R style function definitions.
3361 @defmac OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fntype})
3362 Define this to a nonzero value if it is the responsibility of the
3363 caller to allocate the area reserved for arguments passed in registers
3364 when calling a function of @var{fntype}. @var{fntype} may be NULL
3365 if the function called is a library function.
3367 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
3368 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
3369 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}.
3372 @defmac STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
3373 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
3374 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
3375 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
3376 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
3378 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
3379 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
3380 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
3381 stack in its natural location.
3384 @hook TARGET_RETURN_POPS_ARGS
3386 @defmac CALL_POPS_ARGS (@var{cum})
3387 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes a call sequence
3388 pops off the stack. It is added to the value of @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS}
3389 when compiling a function call.
3391 @var{cum} is the variable in which all arguments to the called function
3392 have been accumulated.
3394 On certain architectures, such as the SH5, a call trampoline is used
3395 that pops certain registers off the stack, depending on the arguments
3396 that have been passed to the function. Since this is a property of the
3397 call site, not of the called function, @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is not
3401 @node Register Arguments
3402 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
3403 @cindex arguments in registers
3404 @cindex registers arguments
3406 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
3407 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
3410 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG
3412 @hook TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
3414 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
3416 @hook TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES
3418 @hook TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
3420 @hook TARGET_CALLEE_COPIES
3422 @defmac CUMULATIVE_ARGS
3423 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument
3424 of @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some
3425 target machines, the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number
3426 of bytes of argument so far.
3428 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
3429 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
3430 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
3431 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
3432 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
3433 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
3436 @defmac OVERRIDE_ABI_FORMAT (@var{fndecl})
3437 If defined, this macro is called before generating any code for a
3438 function, but after the @var{cfun} descriptor for the function has been
3439 created. The back end may use this macro to update @var{cfun} to
3440 reflect an ABI other than that which would normally be used by default.
3441 If the compiler is generating code for a compiler-generated function,
3442 @var{fndecl} may be @code{NULL}.
3445 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{fndecl}, @var{n_named_args})
3446 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable
3447 @var{cum} for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The
3448 variable has type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype}
3449 is the tree node for the data type of the function which will receive
3450 the args, or 0 if the args are to a compiler support library function.
3451 For direct calls that are not libcalls, @var{fndecl} contain the
3452 declaration node of the function. @var{fndecl} is also set when
3453 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
3454 being compiled. @var{n_named_args} is set to the number of named
3455 arguments, including a structure return address if it is passed as a
3456 parameter, when making a call. When processing incoming arguments,
3457 @var{n_named_args} is set to @minus{}1.
3459 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
3460 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
3461 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
3462 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
3463 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
3464 never both of them at once.
3467 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_LIBCALL_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{libname})
3468 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but only used for outgoing libcalls,
3469 it gets a @code{MODE} argument instead of @var{fntype}, that would be
3470 @code{NULL}. @var{indirect} would always be zero, too. If this macro
3471 is not defined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (cum, NULL_RTX, libname,
3472 0)} is used instead.
3475 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
3476 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
3477 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
3478 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
3480 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
3481 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC@. The
3482 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
3483 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
3484 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
3485 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
3488 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
3490 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_OFFSET (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3491 If defined, a C expression that is the number of bytes to add to the
3492 offset of the argument passed in memory. This is needed for the SPU,
3493 which passes @code{char} and @code{short} arguments in the preferred
3494 slot that is in the middle of the quad word instead of starting at the
3498 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3499 If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
3500 to pad out an argument with extra space. The value should be of type
3501 @code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
3502 @code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
3504 The @emph{amount} of padding is not controlled by this macro, but by the
3505 target hook @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY}. It is
3506 always just enough to reach the next multiple of that boundary.
3508 This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
3509 For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward. For
3510 big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
3511 constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
3514 @defmac PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3515 If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
3516 implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
3517 next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
3518 controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}. If this macro is not defined, all such
3519 arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
3522 @defmac BLOCK_REG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{first})
3523 Specify padding for the last element of a block move between registers and
3524 memory. @var{first} is nonzero if this is the only element. Defining this
3525 macro allows better control of register function parameters on big-endian
3526 machines, without using @code{PARALLEL} rtl. In particular,
3527 @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK} need not test padding and mode of types in
3528 registers, as there is no longer a "wrong" part of a register; For example,
3529 a three byte aggregate may be passed in the high part of a register if so
3533 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
3535 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY
3537 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3538 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3539 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
3540 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
3541 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
3542 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
3546 @hook TARGET_SPLIT_COMPLEX_ARG
3548 @hook TARGET_BUILD_BUILTIN_VA_LIST
3550 @hook TARGET_ENUM_VA_LIST_P
3552 @hook TARGET_FN_ABI_VA_LIST
3554 @hook TARGET_CANONICAL_VA_LIST_TYPE
3556 @hook TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR
3558 @hook TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE
3560 @hook TARGET_REF_MAY_ALIAS_ERRNO
3562 @hook TARGET_SCALAR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3564 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3566 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3568 @hook TARGET_SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES_FOR_MODE_P
3570 @hook TARGET_FLAGS_REGNUM
3573 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
3574 @cindex return values in registers
3575 @cindex values, returned by functions
3576 @cindex scalars, returned as values
3578 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
3579 values---values that can fit in registers.
3581 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE
3583 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3584 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} for
3585 a new target instead.
3588 @defmac LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3589 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3590 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}.
3592 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3593 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3594 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3598 @hook TARGET_LIBCALL_VALUE
3600 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3601 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3602 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3604 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3605 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3606 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3610 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3613 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3614 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3615 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3617 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P}
3618 for a new target instead.
3621 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3623 @defmac APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3624 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3625 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3626 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3629 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MSB
3631 @node Aggregate Return
3632 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3633 @cindex aggregates as return values
3634 @cindex large return values
3635 @cindex returning aggregate values
3636 @cindex structure value address
3638 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3639 cases), the value is not returned according to
3640 @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the
3641 caller passes the address of a block of memory in which the value
3642 should be stored. This address is called the @dfn{structure value
3645 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3648 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3650 @defmac DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3651 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3652 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3653 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI@.
3654 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3655 and union return values are decided by the @code{TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY}
3658 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3661 @hook TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX
3663 @defmac PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3664 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3665 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3666 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3668 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3669 pass an address to the subroutine.
3671 This macro has effect in @option{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3672 nothing when you use @option{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3675 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_RESULT_MODE
3677 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_ARG_MODE
3680 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3682 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3683 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3684 must live across calls.
3686 @defmac CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE (@var{refs}, @var{calls})
3687 A C expression to determine whether it is worthwhile to consider placing
3688 a pseudo-register in a call-clobbered hard register and saving and
3689 restoring it around each function call. The expression should be 1 when
3690 this is worth doing, and 0 otherwise.
3692 If you don't define this macro, a default is used which is good on most
3693 machines: @code{4 * @var{calls} < @var{refs}}.
3696 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3697 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3698 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3699 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3700 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3701 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3704 @node Function Entry
3705 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3706 @cindex function entry and exit
3710 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3711 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3713 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3715 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_END_PROLOGUE
3717 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_BEGIN_EPILOGUE
3719 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3723 @findex pretend_args_size
3724 @findex crtl->args.pretend_args_size
3725 A region of @code{crtl->args.pretend_args_size} bytes of
3726 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3727 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3728 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3729 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3730 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3731 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3732 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3733 features in @code{<stdarg.h>}.
3736 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3737 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3738 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3739 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3740 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3744 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3745 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3746 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3747 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3750 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3751 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3752 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3753 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3756 @defmac EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3757 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3758 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3759 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3760 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function. The
3763 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3764 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3765 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3766 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3769 @defmac EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3770 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3771 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3772 pointer registers are already assumed to be used as needed.
3775 @defmac EH_USES (@var{regno})
3776 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3777 used by the exception handling mechanism, and so should be considered live
3778 on entry to an exception edge.
3781 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3783 @hook TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3786 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3787 @cindex profiling, code generation
3789 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3791 @defmac FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3792 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3793 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3796 The details of how @code{mcount} expects to be called are determined by
3797 your operating system environment, not by GCC@. To figure them out,
3798 compile a small program for profiling using the system's installed C
3799 compiler and look at the assembler code that results.
3801 Older implementations of @code{mcount} expect the address of a counter
3802 variable to be loaded into some register. The name of this variable is
3803 @samp{LP} followed by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate
3804 the name using @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3807 @defmac PROFILE_HOOK
3808 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some assembly
3809 code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount} even the target does
3810 not support profiling.
3813 @defmac NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3814 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if the
3815 @code{mcount} subroutine on your system does not need a counter variable
3816 allocated for each function. This is true for almost all modern
3817 implementations. If you define this macro, you must not use the
3818 @var{labelno} argument to @code{FUNCTION_PROFILER}.
3821 @defmac PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3822 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3823 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3826 @hook TARGET_KEEP_LEAF_WHEN_PROFILED
3829 @subsection Permitting tail calls
3832 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
3834 @hook TARGET_EXTRA_LIVE_ON_ENTRY
3836 @hook TARGET_SET_UP_BY_PROLOGUE
3838 @hook TARGET_WARN_FUNC_RETURN
3840 @node Stack Smashing Protection
3841 @subsection Stack smashing protection
3842 @cindex stack smashing protection
3844 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_GUARD
3846 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_FAIL
3848 @hook TARGET_SUPPORTS_SPLIT_STACK
3850 @node Miscellaneous Register Hooks
3851 @subsection Miscellaneous register hooks
3852 @cindex miscellaneous register hooks
3854 @hook TARGET_CALL_FUSAGE_CONTAINS_NON_CALLEE_CLOBBERS
3857 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3858 @cindex varargs implementation
3860 GCC comes with an implementation of @code{<varargs.h>} and
3861 @code{<stdarg.h>} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3862 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3863 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3864 conditionals to include it.
3866 ISO @code{<stdarg.h>} differs from traditional @code{<varargs.h>} mainly in
3867 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3868 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3869 to store the argument pointer. The ISO implementation of
3870 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3871 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3873 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3874 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3877 @defmac __builtin_saveregs ()
3878 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3879 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ISO and traditional
3880 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3881 you use @code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3883 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3884 control of the target hook @code{TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On
3885 other machines, it calls a routine written in assembler language,
3886 found in @file{libgcc2.c}.
3888 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3889 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3890 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3891 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3892 to use them for its own purposes.
3893 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3897 @defmac __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3898 This builtin returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3899 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3900 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3901 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3902 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3903 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3904 of the current function.
3907 @defmac __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3908 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3909 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3910 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3911 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3912 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3914 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3915 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3916 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3918 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3919 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3922 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3924 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3926 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3928 @hook TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3930 @hook TARGET_PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3933 @section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3934 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3935 @cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3937 A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3938 when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3939 the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
3940 tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
3943 The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3944 address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3945 the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3946 two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3947 exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3948 machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3949 two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3952 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3953 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3954 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3955 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3956 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3957 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3960 @hook TARGET_ASM_TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3962 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3963 Return the section into which the trampoline template is to be placed
3964 (@pxref{Sections}). The default value is @code{readonly_data_section}.
3967 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3968 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3971 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3972 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3974 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{FUNCTION_ALIGNMENT}
3975 is used for aligning trampolines.
3978 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT
3980 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_ADJUST_ADDRESS
3982 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3983 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3984 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3985 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3987 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3988 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3989 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3990 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3991 latter makes initialization faster.
3993 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3994 the following macro.
3996 @defmac CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{beg}, @var{end})
3997 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3998 cache} in the specified interval. The definition of this macro would
3999 typically be a series of @code{asm} statements. Both @var{beg} and
4000 @var{end} are both pointer expressions.
4003 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
4004 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
4005 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
4006 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
4007 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
4009 @defmac TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
4010 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
4011 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
4012 which will be compiled with GCC@. They go in a library function named
4013 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
4015 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
4016 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
4017 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
4018 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
4019 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
4020 special assembler code.
4024 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
4025 @cindex library subroutine names
4026 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
4028 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4029 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
4031 @defmac DECLARE_LIBRARY_RENAMES
4032 This macro, if defined, should expand to a piece of C code that will get
4033 expanded when compiling functions for libgcc.a. It can be used to
4034 provide alternate names for GCC's internal library functions if there
4035 are ABI-mandated names that the compiler should provide.
4038 @findex set_optab_libfunc
4039 @findex init_one_libfunc
4040 @hook TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS
4042 @hook TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX
4044 @defmac FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
4045 This macro should return @code{true} if the library routine that
4046 implements the floating point comparison operator @var{comparison} in
4047 mode @var{mode} will return a boolean, and @var{false} if it will
4050 GCC's own floating point libraries return tristates from the
4051 comparison operators, so the default returns false always. Most ports
4052 don't need to define this macro.
4055 @defmac TARGET_LIB_INT_CMP_BIASED
4056 This macro should evaluate to @code{true} if the integer comparison
4057 functions (like @code{__cmpdi2}) return 0 to indicate that the first
4058 operand is smaller than the second, 1 to indicate that they are equal,
4059 and 2 to indicate that the first operand is greater than the second.
4060 If this macro evaluates to @code{false} the comparison functions return
4061 @minus{}1, 0, and 1 instead of 0, 1, and 2. If the target uses the routines
4062 in @file{libgcc.a}, you do not need to define this macro.
4065 @defmac TARGET_HAS_NO_HW_DIVIDE
4066 This macro should be defined if the target has no hardware divide
4067 instructions. If this macro is defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
4068 make use of simple logical and arithmetic operations for 64-bit
4069 division. If the macro is not defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
4070 make use of a 64-bit by 32-bit divide primitive.
4073 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
4076 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
4077 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
4078 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
4079 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
4082 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
4083 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
4084 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
4085 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
4086 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
4089 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
4090 @defmac GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4091 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
4092 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
4093 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
4094 macro, a reasonable default is used.
4097 @hook TARGET_LIBC_HAS_FUNCTION
4099 @defmac NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4100 Set this macro to 1 to use the "NeXT" Objective-C message sending conventions
4101 by default. This calling convention involves passing the object, the selector
4102 and the method arguments all at once to the method-lookup library function.
4103 This is the usual setting when targeting Darwin/Mac OS X systems, which have
4104 the NeXT runtime installed.
4106 If the macro is set to 0, the "GNU" Objective-C message sending convention
4107 will be used by default. This convention passes just the object and the
4108 selector to the method-lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4110 In either case, it remains possible to select code-generation for the alternate
4111 scheme, by means of compiler command line switches.
4114 @node Addressing Modes
4115 @section Addressing Modes
4116 @cindex addressing modes
4118 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4119 This is about addressing modes.
4121 @defmac HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4122 @defmacx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4123 @defmacx HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4124 @defmacx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4125 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre-increment,
4126 pre-decrement, post-increment, or post-decrement addressing respectively.
4129 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
4130 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
4131 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4132 post-address side-effect generation involving constants other than
4133 the size of the memory operand.
4136 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
4137 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
4138 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4139 post-address side-effect generation involving a register displacement.
4142 @defmac CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4143 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4144 is a valid address. On most machines the default definition of
4145 @code{(CONSTANT_P (@var{x}) && GET_CODE (@var{x}) != CONST_DOUBLE)}
4146 is acceptable, but a few machines are more restrictive as to which
4147 constant addresses are supported.
4150 @defmac CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4151 @code{CONSTANT_P}, which is defined by target-independent code,
4152 accepts integer-values expressions whose values are not explicitly
4153 known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and @code{high}
4154 expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in addition to
4155 @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4158 @defmac MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4159 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4160 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4161 the maximum number that @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} would ever
4165 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
4167 @defmac TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT
4168 A single character to be used instead of the default @code{'m'}
4169 character for general memory addresses. This defines the constraint
4170 letter which matches the memory addresses accepted by
4171 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P}. Define this macro if you want to
4172 support new address formats in your back end without changing the
4173 semantics of the @code{'m'} constraint. This is necessary in order to
4174 preserve functionality of inline assembly constructs using the
4175 @code{'m'} constraint.
4178 @defmac FIND_BASE_TERM (@var{x})
4179 A C expression to determine the base term of address @var{x},
4180 or to provide a simplified version of @var{x} from which @file{alias.c}
4181 can easily find the base term. This macro is used in only two places:
4182 @code{find_base_value} and @code{find_base_term} in @file{alias.c}.
4184 It is always safe for this macro to not be defined. It exists so
4185 that alias analysis can understand machine-dependent addresses.
4187 The typical use of this macro is to handle addresses containing
4188 a label_ref or symbol_ref within an UNSPEC@.
4191 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4193 @defmac LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4194 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4195 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4196 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4197 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4198 performance reasons.
4200 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4201 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4202 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4203 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4204 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4205 @code{LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS} appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4206 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4209 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4210 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4211 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4212 of reload internals.
4214 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4215 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4216 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4219 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4220 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4221 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4223 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4224 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4225 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4226 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4229 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4230 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4231 the address has become legitimate.
4234 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4235 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that it unshares only a
4236 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4237 top level, you'll need to replace first the top level.
4238 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4239 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4242 @hook TARGET_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS_P
4244 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4246 @hook TARGET_DELEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4248 @hook TARGET_CONST_NOT_OK_FOR_DEBUG_P
4250 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM
4252 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_CONSTANT_P
4254 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_DECL_P
4256 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_RECIPROCAL
4258 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MASK_FOR_LOAD
4260 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZATION_COST
4262 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT_REACHABLE
4264 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VEC_PERM_CONST_OK
4266 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_CONVERSION
4268 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4270 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SUPPORT_VECTOR_MISALIGNMENT
4272 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_SIMD_MODE
4274 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_AUTOVECTORIZE_VECTOR_SIZES
4276 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_INIT_COST
4278 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_ADD_STMT_COST
4280 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_FINISH_COST
4282 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_DESTROY_COST_DATA
4284 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_TM_LOAD
4286 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_TM_STORE
4288 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_GATHER
4290 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_COMPUTE_VECSIZE_AND_SIMDLEN
4292 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_ADJUST
4294 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_USABLE
4296 @node Anchored Addresses
4297 @section Anchored Addresses
4298 @cindex anchored addresses
4299 @cindex @option{-fsection-anchors}
4301 GCC usually addresses every static object as a separate entity.
4302 For example, if we have:
4306 int foo (void) @{ return a + b + c; @}
4309 the code for @code{foo} will usually calculate three separate symbolic
4310 addresses: those of @code{a}, @code{b} and @code{c}. On some targets,
4311 it would be better to calculate just one symbolic address and access
4312 the three variables relative to it. The equivalent pseudocode would
4318 register int *xr = &x;
4319 return xr[&a - &x] + xr[&b - &x] + xr[&c - &x];
4323 (which isn't valid C). We refer to shared addresses like @code{x} as
4324 ``section anchors''. Their use is controlled by @option{-fsection-anchors}.
4326 The hooks below describe the target properties that GCC needs to know
4327 in order to make effective use of section anchors. It won't use
4328 section anchors at all unless either @code{TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET}
4329 or @code{TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET} is set to a nonzero value.
4331 @hook TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4333 @hook TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4335 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ANCHOR
4337 @hook TARGET_USE_ANCHORS_FOR_SYMBOL_P
4339 @node Condition Code
4340 @section Condition Code Status
4341 @cindex condition code status
4343 The macros in this section can be split in two families, according to the
4344 two ways of representing condition codes in GCC.
4346 The first representation is the so called @code{(cc0)} representation
4347 (@pxref{Jump Patterns}), where all instructions can have an implicit
4348 clobber of the condition codes. The second is the condition code
4349 register representation, which provides better schedulability for
4350 architectures that do have a condition code register, but on which
4351 most instructions do not affect it. The latter category includes
4354 The implicit clobbering poses a strong restriction on the placement of
4355 the definition and use of the condition code. In the past the definition
4356 and use were always adjacent. However, recent changes to support trapping
4357 arithmatic may result in the definition and user being in different blocks.
4358 Thus, there may be a @code{NOTE_INSN_BASIC_BLOCK} between them. Additionally,
4359 the definition may be the source of exception handling edges.
4361 These restrictions can prevent important
4362 optimizations on some machines. For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there
4363 is a delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set
4364 three instructions earlier than the conditional branch. The instruction
4365 scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to
4366 separate the definition and use of the condition code register.
4368 For this reason, it is possible and suggested to use a register to
4369 represent the condition code for new ports. If there is a specific
4370 condition code register in the machine, use a hard register. If the
4371 condition code or comparison result can be placed in any general register,
4372 or if there are multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register.
4373 Registers used to store the condition code value will usually have a mode
4374 that is in class @code{MODE_CC}.
4376 Alternatively, you can use @code{BImode} if the comparison operator is
4377 specified already in the compare instruction. In this case, you are not
4378 interested in most macros in this section.
4381 * CC0 Condition Codes:: Old style representation of condition codes.
4382 * MODE_CC Condition Codes:: Modern representation of condition codes.
4385 @node CC0 Condition Codes
4386 @subsection Representation of condition codes using @code{(cc0)}
4390 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4391 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4392 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4393 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4394 currently based, and several standard flags.
4396 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4397 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4398 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4400 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP
4401 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4402 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4404 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4407 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4408 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4409 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4410 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4411 define this macro to initialize it.
4413 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4416 @defmac NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4417 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4418 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4419 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4420 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4423 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4425 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4426 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4427 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4428 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4429 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4430 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4431 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4432 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4433 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4434 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4435 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4436 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4437 condition code value.
4439 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4440 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4441 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4442 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4443 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4444 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4445 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4447 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4448 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4449 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4450 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4453 @node MODE_CC Condition Codes
4454 @subsection Representation of condition codes using registers
4458 @defmac SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4459 On many machines, the condition code may be produced by other instructions
4460 than compares, for example the branch can use directly the condition
4461 code set by a subtract instruction. However, on some machines
4462 when the condition code is set this way some bits (such as the overflow
4463 bit) are not set in the same way as a test instruction, so that a different
4464 branch instruction must be used for some conditional branches. When
4465 this happens, use the machine mode of the condition code register to
4466 record different formats of the condition code register. Modes can
4467 also be used to record which compare instruction (e.g. a signed or an
4468 unsigned comparison) produced the condition codes.
4470 If other modes than @code{CCmode} are required, add them to
4471 @file{@var{machine}-modes.def} and define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose
4472 a mode given an operand of a compare. This is needed because the modes
4473 have to be chosen not only during RTL generation but also, for example,
4474 by instruction combination. The result of @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} should
4475 be consistent with the mode used in the patterns; for example to support
4476 the case of the add on the SPARC discussed above, we have the pattern
4480 [(set (reg:CC_NOOV 0)
4482 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r")
4483 (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI"))
4490 together with a @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} that returns @code{CC_NOOVmode}
4491 for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}:
4494 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4495 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4496 ? ((OP == EQ || OP == NE) ? CCFPmode : CCFPEmode) \
4497 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4498 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG) \
4499 ? CC_NOOVmode : CCmode))
4502 Another reason to use modes is to retain information on which operands
4503 were used by the comparison; see @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE} later in
4506 You should define this macro if and only if you define extra CC modes
4507 in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def}.
4510 @hook TARGET_CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4512 @defmac REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4513 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4514 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4515 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4516 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4518 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4519 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4520 For example, here is the definition used on the SPARC, where floating-point
4521 inequality comparisons are always given @code{CCFPEmode}:
4524 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) ((MODE) != CCFPEmode)
4528 @defmac REVERSE_CONDITION (@var{code}, @var{mode})
4529 A C expression whose value is reversed condition code of the @var{code} for
4530 comparison done in CC_MODE @var{mode}. The macro is used only in case
4531 @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} is nonzero. Define this macro in case
4532 machine has some non-standard way how to reverse certain conditionals. For
4533 instance in case all floating point conditions are non-trapping, compiler may
4534 freely convert unordered compares to ordered one. Then definition may look
4538 #define REVERSE_CONDITION(CODE, MODE) \
4539 ((MODE) != CCFPmode ? reverse_condition (CODE) \
4540 : reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (CODE))
4544 @hook TARGET_FIXED_CONDITION_CODE_REGS
4546 @hook TARGET_CC_MODES_COMPATIBLE
4549 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4550 @cindex costs of instructions
4551 @cindex relative costs
4552 @cindex speed of instructions
4554 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4555 on the target machine.
4557 @defmac REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4558 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} from a
4559 register in class @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are
4560 expressed using the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A
4561 value of 2 is the default; other values are interpreted relative to
4564 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4565 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4566 registers if they are not general registers.
4568 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4569 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4570 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4571 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4572 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4573 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4575 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4576 @code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST} instead.
4579 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4581 @defmac MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4582 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4583 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4584 is to be written to memory, nonzero if it is to be read in. This cost
4585 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4586 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4587 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4589 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4590 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4591 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4592 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4593 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4594 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4596 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4597 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4598 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4599 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4600 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4601 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4602 are the same as to this macro.
4604 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4605 @code{TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST} instead.
4608 @hook TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4610 @defmac BRANCH_COST (@var{speed_p}, @var{predictable_p})
4611 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4612 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that. Parameter
4613 @var{speed_p} is true when the branch in question should be optimized
4614 for speed. When it is false, @code{BRANCH_COST} should return a value
4615 optimal for code size rather than performance. @var{predictable_p} is
4616 true for well-predicted branches. On many architectures the
4617 @code{BRANCH_COST} can be reduced then.
4620 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4621 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4624 @defmac SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4625 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4626 than a word of memory (i.e.@: a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4627 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4628 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4629 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4631 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4632 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4633 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4634 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4635 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4636 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4639 @defmac SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (@var{mode}, @var{alignment})
4640 Define this macro to be the value 1 if memory accesses described by the
4641 @var{mode} and @var{alignment} parameters have a cost many times greater
4642 than aligned accesses, for example if they are emulated in a trap
4645 When this macro is nonzero, the compiler will act as if
4646 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were nonzero when generating code for block
4647 moves. This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
4648 Therefore, do not set this macro nonzero if unaligned accesses only add a
4649 cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
4651 If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined. If
4652 this macro is defined, it should produce a nonzero value when
4653 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} is nonzero.
4656 @defmac MOVE_RATIO (@var{speed})
4657 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4658 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4659 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4660 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4662 Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4663 @code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4664 the number of such sequences.
4666 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4667 optimized for speed rather than size.
4669 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4672 @defmac MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (@var{size}, @var{alignment})
4673 A C expression used to determine whether @code{move_by_pieces} will be used to
4674 copy a chunk of memory, or whether some other block move mechanism
4675 will be used. Defaults to 1 if @code{move_by_pieces_ninsns} returns less
4676 than @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4679 @defmac MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4680 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4681 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4684 @defmac CLEAR_RATIO (@var{speed})
4685 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4686 of insns should be generated to clear memory instead of a string clear insn
4687 or a library call. Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4688 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4690 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4691 optimized for speed rather than size.
4693 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4696 @defmac CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P (@var{size}, @var{alignment})
4697 A C expression used to determine whether @code{clear_by_pieces} will be used
4698 to clear a chunk of memory, or whether some other block clear mechanism
4699 will be used. Defaults to 1 if @code{move_by_pieces_ninsns} returns less
4700 than @code{CLEAR_RATIO}.
4703 @defmac SET_RATIO (@var{speed})
4704 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4705 of insns should be generated to set memory to a constant value, instead of
4706 a block set insn or a library call.
4707 Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4708 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4710 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4711 optimized for speed rather than size.
4713 If you don't define this, it defaults to the value of @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4716 @defmac SET_BY_PIECES_P (@var{size}, @var{alignment})
4717 A C expression used to determine whether @code{store_by_pieces} will be
4718 used to set a chunk of memory to a constant value, or whether some
4719 other mechanism will be used. Used by @code{__builtin_memset} when
4720 storing values other than constant zero.
4721 Defaults to 1 if @code{move_by_pieces_ninsns} returns less
4722 than @code{SET_RATIO}.
4725 @defmac STORE_BY_PIECES_P (@var{size}, @var{alignment})
4726 A C expression used to determine whether @code{store_by_pieces} will be
4727 used to set a chunk of memory to a constant string value, or whether some
4728 other mechanism will be used. Used by @code{__builtin_strcpy} when
4729 called with a constant source string.
4730 Defaults to 1 if @code{move_by_pieces_ninsns} returns less
4731 than @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4734 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4735 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4736 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4737 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4740 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4741 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4742 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4743 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4746 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4747 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4748 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4749 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4752 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4753 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4754 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4755 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4758 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4759 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4760 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4761 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4764 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4765 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdecrement is a good
4766 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4767 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4770 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4771 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4772 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4773 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4776 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4777 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4778 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4779 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4782 @defmac NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4783 Define this macro if it is as good or better to call a constant
4784 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4787 @defmac LOGICAL_OP_NON_SHORT_CIRCUIT
4788 Define this macro if a non-short-circuit operation produced by
4789 @samp{fold_range_test ()} is optimal. This macro defaults to true if
4790 @code{BRANCH_COST} is greater than or equal to the value 2.
4793 @hook TARGET_RTX_COSTS
4795 @hook TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
4798 @section Adjusting the Instruction Scheduler
4800 The instruction scheduler may need a fair amount of machine-specific
4801 adjustment in order to produce good code. GCC provides several target
4802 hooks for this purpose. It is usually enough to define just a few of
4803 them: try the first ones in this list first.
4805 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
4807 @hook TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
4809 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
4811 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_PRIORITY
4813 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER
4815 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER2
4817 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_P
4819 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_PAIR_P
4821 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DEPENDENCIES_EVALUATION_HOOK
4823 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT
4825 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH
4827 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_GLOBAL
4829 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH_GLOBAL
4831 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4833 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4835 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4837 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4839 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4841 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4843 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
4845 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD_GUARD
4847 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BEGIN
4849 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_ISSUE
4851 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BACKTRACK
4853 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_END
4855 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_INIT
4857 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_FINI
4859 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_NEW_CYCLE
4861 @hook TARGET_SCHED_IS_COSTLY_DEPENDENCE
4863 @hook TARGET_SCHED_H_I_D_EXTENDED
4865 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ALLOC_SCHED_CONTEXT
4867 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_SCHED_CONTEXT
4869 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_CONTEXT
4871 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CLEAR_SCHED_CONTEXT
4873 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FREE_SCHED_CONTEXT
4875 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SPECULATE_INSN
4877 @hook TARGET_SCHED_NEEDS_BLOCK_P
4879 @hook TARGET_SCHED_GEN_SPEC_CHECK
4881 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_FLAGS
4883 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SMS_RES_MII
4885 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH
4887 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH_DO
4889 @hook TARGET_SCHED_EXPOSED_PIPELINE
4891 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REASSOCIATION_WIDTH
4894 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4895 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4896 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4898 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4899 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4900 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4901 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4902 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4905 @file{varasm.c} provides several well-known sections, such as
4906 @code{text_section}, @code{data_section} and @code{bss_section}.
4907 The normal way of controlling a @code{@var{foo}_section} variable
4908 is to define the associated @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macro,
4909 as described below. The macros are only read once, when @file{varasm.c}
4910 initializes itself, so their values must be run-time constants.
4911 They may however depend on command-line flags.
4913 @emph{Note:} Some run-time files, such @file{crtstuff.c}, also make
4914 use of the @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macros, and expect them
4915 to be string literals.
4917 Some assemblers require a different string to be written every time a
4918 section is selected. If your assembler falls into this category, you
4919 should define the @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS} hook and use
4920 @code{get_unnamed_section} to set up the sections.
4922 You must always create a @code{text_section}, either by defining
4923 @code{TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or by initializing @code{text_section}
4924 in @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS}. The same is true of
4925 @code{data_section} and @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP}. If you do not
4926 create a distinct @code{readonly_data_section}, the default is to
4927 reuse @code{text_section}.
4929 All the other @file{varasm.c} sections are optional, and are null
4930 if the target does not provide them.
4932 @defmac TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4933 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4934 assembler operation that should precede instructions and read-only data.
4935 Normally @code{"\t.text"} is right.
4938 @defmac HOT_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4939 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing most
4940 frequently executed functions of the program. If not defined, GCC will provide
4941 a default definition if the target supports named sections.
4944 @defmac UNLIKELY_EXECUTED_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4945 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing unlikely
4946 executed functions in the program.
4949 @defmac DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4950 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4951 assembler operation to identify the following data as writable initialized
4952 data. Normally @code{"\t.data"} is right.
4955 @defmac SDATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4956 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4957 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4958 initialized, writable small data.
4961 @defmac READONLY_DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4962 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4963 assembler operation to identify the following data as read-only initialized
4967 @defmac BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4968 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4969 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4970 uninitialized global data. If not defined, and
4971 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} not defined,
4972 uninitialized global data will be output in the data section if
4973 @option{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be
4977 @defmac SBSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4978 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4979 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4980 uninitialized, writable small data.
4983 @defmac TLS_COMMON_ASM_OP
4984 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4985 assembler operation to identify the following data as thread-local
4986 common data. The default is @code{".tls_common"}.
4989 @defmac TLS_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4990 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4991 containing the flag used to mark a section as a TLS section. The
4992 default is @code{'T'}.
4995 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4996 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4997 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4998 initialization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4999 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{init_section}
5000 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
5003 @defmac FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP
5004 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
5005 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
5006 finalization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
5007 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{fini_section}
5008 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
5011 @defmac INIT_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
5012 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
5013 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
5014 part of the @code{.init_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
5015 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
5016 both this macro and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
5019 @defmac FINI_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
5020 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
5021 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
5022 part of the @code{.fini_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
5023 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
5024 both this macro and @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
5027 @defmac CRT_CALL_STATIC_FUNCTION (@var{section_op}, @var{function})
5028 If defined, an ASM statement that switches to a different section
5029 via @var{section_op}, calls @var{function}, and switches back to
5030 the text section. This is used in @file{crtstuff.c} if
5031 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP} to calls
5032 to initialization and finalization functions from the init and fini
5033 sections. By default, this macro uses a simple function call. Some
5034 ports need hand-crafted assembly code to avoid dependencies on
5035 registers initialized in the function prologue or to ensure that
5036 constant pools don't end up too far way in the text section.
5039 @defmac TARGET_LIBGCC_SDATA_SECTION
5040 If defined, a string which names the section into which small
5041 variables defined in crtstuff and libgcc should go. This is useful
5042 when the target has options for optimizing access to small data, and
5043 you want the crtstuff and libgcc routines to be conservative in what
5044 they expect of your application yet liberal in what your application
5045 expects. For example, for targets with a @code{.sdata} section (like
5046 MIPS), you could compile crtstuff with @code{-G 0} so that it doesn't
5047 require small data support from your application, but use this macro
5048 to put small data into @code{.sdata} so that your application can
5049 access these variables whether it uses small data or not.
5052 @defmac FORCE_CODE_SECTION_ALIGN
5053 If defined, an ASM statement that aligns a code section to some
5054 arbitrary boundary. This is used to force all fragments of the
5055 @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections to have to same alignment
5056 and thus prevent the linker from having to add any padding.
5059 @defmac JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
5060 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if jump
5061 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
5062 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
5063 readonly data section is used.
5065 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
5068 @hook TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS
5070 @hook TARGET_ASM_RELOC_RW_MASK
5072 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION
5074 @defmac USE_SELECT_SECTION_FOR_FUNCTIONS
5075 Define this macro if you wish TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION to be called
5076 for @code{FUNCTION_DECL}s as well as for variables and constants.
5078 In the case of a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, @var{reloc} will be zero if the
5079 function has been determined to be likely to be called, and nonzero if
5080 it is unlikely to be called.
5083 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNIQUE_SECTION
5085 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_RODATA_SECTION
5087 @hook TARGET_ASM_MERGEABLE_RODATA_PREFIX
5089 @hook TARGET_ASM_TM_CLONE_TABLE_SECTION
5091 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_RTX_SECTION
5093 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_DECL_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5095 @hook TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
5097 @hook TARGET_STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
5099 @hook TARGET_IN_SMALL_DATA_P
5101 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SRODATA_SECTION
5103 @hook TARGET_PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
5105 @hook TARGET_BINDS_LOCAL_P
5107 @hook TARGET_HAVE_TLS
5111 @section Position Independent Code
5112 @cindex position independent code
5115 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
5116 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
5117 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the hook
5118 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} and to the macro
5119 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You
5120 must modify the definition of @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate
5121 when the source operand contains a symbolic address. You may also
5122 need to alter the handling of switch statements so that they use
5124 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
5125 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
5127 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5128 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
5129 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
5130 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI)@. When this macro
5131 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
5132 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
5133 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
5134 necessary). Note that this register must be fixed when in use (e.g.@:
5135 when @code{flag_pic} is true).
5138 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5139 A C expression that is nonzero if the register defined by
5140 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. If not defined,
5141 the default is zero. Do not define
5142 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
5145 @defmac LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
5146 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
5147 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
5148 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
5149 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
5150 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
5151 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
5152 position independent code.
5155 @node Assembler Format
5156 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5158 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5159 to write instructions in assembler language---rather than what the
5163 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5164 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5165 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5166 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5167 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5168 and termination routines.
5169 * Macros for Initialization::
5170 Specific macros that control the handling of
5171 initialization and termination routines.
5172 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5173 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5174 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5175 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5178 @node File Framework
5179 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5180 @cindex assembler format
5181 @cindex output of assembler code
5183 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5184 This describes the overall framework of an assembly file.
5186 @findex default_file_start
5187 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START
5189 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_APP_OFF
5191 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_FILE_DIRECTIVE
5193 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_END
5195 @deftypefun void file_end_indicate_exec_stack ()
5196 Some systems use a common convention, the @samp{.note.GNU-stack}
5197 special section, to indicate whether or not an object file relies on
5198 the stack being executable. If your system uses this convention, you
5199 should define @code{TARGET_ASM_FILE_END} to this function. If you
5200 need to do other things in that hook, have your hook function call
5204 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_START
5206 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_END
5208 @hook TARGET_ASM_CODE_END
5210 @defmac ASM_COMMENT_START
5211 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5212 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5213 the end of the line.
5217 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5218 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5219 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5220 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5221 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5225 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5226 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5227 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5228 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5231 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5232 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5233 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5234 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5236 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5237 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5240 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5242 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5244 @defmac OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5245 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5246 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5247 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5248 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5249 of the filename using this macro.
5252 @hook TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION
5254 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SECTION
5256 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SWITCHED_TEXT_SECTIONS
5258 @hook TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS
5259 This flag is true if the target supports @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION}.
5260 It must not be modified by command-line option processing.
5263 @anchor{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}
5264 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS
5266 @hook TARGET_SECTION_TYPE_FLAGS
5268 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES
5270 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES_SECTION
5274 @subsection Output of Data
5277 @hook TARGET_ASM_BYTE_OP
5279 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
5281 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_CONST_EXTRA
5283 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5284 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5285 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5286 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5287 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5289 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5290 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5291 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5294 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FDESC (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{n})
5295 A C statement to output word @var{n} of a function descriptor for
5296 @var{decl}. This must be defined if @code{TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS}
5297 is defined, and is otherwise unused.
5300 @defmac CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5301 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5302 expression to have a nonzero value if GCC should output the constant
5303 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5304 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5305 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5306 pool before the function.
5309 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
5310 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5311 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5312 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5313 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5314 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5315 immediately after this call.
5317 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5321 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5322 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5323 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5324 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5326 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5327 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5328 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5329 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5330 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5333 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5334 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5335 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5336 Here is how to do this:
5339 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5342 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5343 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5344 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5346 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5349 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5350 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5351 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5352 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5353 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5354 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5356 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5360 @defmac IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C}, @var{STR})
5361 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5362 used as a logical line separator by the assembler. @var{STR} points
5363 to the position in the string where @var{C} was found; this can be used if
5364 a line separator uses multiple characters.
5366 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5367 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5370 @hook TARGET_ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5372 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5373 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5375 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5376 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5377 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5378 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5379 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL64 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5380 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL128 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5381 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the
5382 target's floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in
5383 the variable @var{l}. For @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE} and
5384 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32}, this variable should be a
5385 simple @code{long int}. For the others, it should be an array of
5386 @code{long int}. The number of elements in this array is determined
5387 by the size of the desired target floating point data type: 32 bits of
5388 it go in each @code{long int} array element. Each array element holds
5389 32 bits of the result, even if @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits
5390 on the host machine.
5392 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5393 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5397 @node Uninitialized Data
5398 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5400 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5401 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5403 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5404 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5405 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5406 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5407 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants. It is
5408 possible that @var{size} may be zero, for instance if a struct with no
5409 other member than a zero-length array is defined. In this case, the
5410 backend must output a symbol definition that allocates at least one
5411 byte, both so that the address of the resulting object does not compare
5412 equal to any other, and because some object formats cannot even express
5413 the concept of a zero-sized common symbol, as that is how they represent
5414 an ordinary undefined external.
5416 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5417 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5418 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5420 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5421 common global variables are output.
5424 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5425 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5426 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5427 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5428 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5429 as the number of bits.
5432 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5433 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5434 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5435 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5436 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5437 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5438 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5441 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5442 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5443 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5444 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{alignment}
5445 is the alignment specified as the number of bits.
5447 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5448 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5449 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5450 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5451 the name, and a newline.
5453 There are two ways of handling global BSS@. One is to define this macro.
5454 The other is to have @code{TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION} return a
5455 switchable BSS section (@pxref{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}).
5456 You do not need to do both.
5458 Some languages do not have @code{common} data, and require a
5459 non-common form of global BSS in order to handle uninitialized globals
5460 efficiently. C++ is one example of this. However, if the target does
5461 not support global BSS, the front end may choose to make globals
5462 common in order to save space in the object file.
5465 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5466 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5467 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5468 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5469 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5471 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5472 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5473 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5475 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5476 static variables are output.
5479 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5480 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5481 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5482 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5483 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5484 as the number of bits.
5487 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5488 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5489 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5490 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5491 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5492 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5493 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5497 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5499 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5500 This is about outputting labels.
5502 @findex assemble_name
5503 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5504 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5505 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5506 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5507 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5508 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5509 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5512 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5513 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5514 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name} of
5516 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5517 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5518 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5519 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5521 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5522 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5525 @findex assemble_name_raw
5526 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5527 Identical to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}, except that @var{name} is known
5528 to refer to a compiler-generated label. The default definition uses
5529 @code{assemble_name_raw}, which is like @code{assemble_name} except
5530 that it is more efficient.
5534 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5535 size of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5536 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.size\t"}; on other
5537 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5539 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definitions
5540 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE}
5541 for your system. If you need your own custom definitions of those
5542 macros, or if you do not need explicit symbol sizes at all, do not
5546 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size})
5547 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5548 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the size of the
5549 symbol @var{name} is @var{size}. @var{size} is a @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}.
5550 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5554 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5555 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5556 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler to calculate the size of
5557 the symbol @var{name} by subtracting its address from the current
5560 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5561 provided. The default assumes that the assembler recognizes a special
5562 @samp{.} symbol as referring to the current address, and can calculate
5563 the difference between this and another symbol. If your assembler does
5564 not recognize @samp{.} or cannot do calculations with it, you will need
5565 to redefine @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} to use some other technique.
5568 @defmac NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
5569 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5570 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
5571 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
5572 @samp{.} is used instead.
5575 @defmac NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
5576 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5577 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
5578 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
5579 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
5583 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5584 type of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5585 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.type\t"}; on other
5586 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5588 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5589 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5590 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5591 types at all, do not define this macro.
5594 @defmac TYPE_OPERAND_FMT
5595 A C string which specifies (using @code{printf} syntax) the format of
5596 the second operand to @code{TYPE_ASM_OP}. On systems that use ELF, the
5597 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"@@%s"}; on other systems,
5598 the default is not to define this macro.
5600 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5601 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5602 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5603 types at all, do not define this macro.
5606 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{type})
5607 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5608 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the type of the
5609 symbol @var{name} is @var{type}. @var{type} is a C string; currently,
5610 that string is always either @samp{"function"} or @samp{"object"}, but
5611 you should not count on this.
5613 If you define @code{TYPE_ASM_OP} and @code{TYPE_OPERAND_FMT}, a default
5614 definition of this macro is provided.
5617 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5618 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5619 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5620 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5621 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5622 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5623 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5625 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5626 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}).
5628 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5632 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5633 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5634 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5635 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5636 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5637 representing the function.
5639 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5641 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5645 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5646 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5647 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5648 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5649 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5650 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5652 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5653 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5655 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5656 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition of this macro.
5659 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECLARE_CONSTANT_NAME
5661 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5662 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5663 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5664 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5666 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5670 @defmac ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5671 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5672 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5673 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5674 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5675 something about the size of the object.
5677 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5680 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5681 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition of this macro.
5684 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5686 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_DECL_NAME
5688 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5689 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5690 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5691 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5692 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5693 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5694 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5695 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5697 If you don't define this macro or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}, GCC will not
5698 support weak symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK}
5702 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_DECL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5703 Combines (and replaces) the function of @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} and
5704 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS}, allowing access to the associated function
5705 or variable decl. If @var{value} is not @code{NULL}, this C statement
5706 should output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code which
5707 defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5708 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it should output commands
5709 to make @var{name} weak.
5712 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAKREF (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5713 Outputs a directive that enables @var{name} to be used to refer to
5714 symbol @var{value} with weak-symbol semantics. @code{decl} is the
5715 declaration of @code{name}.
5718 @defmac SUPPORTS_WEAK
5719 A preprocessor constant expression which evaluates to true if the target
5720 supports weak symbols.
5722 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5723 definition. If either @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}
5724 is defined, the default definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}.
5727 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WEAK
5728 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5730 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5731 definition. The default definition is @samp{(SUPPORTS_WEAK)}. Define
5732 this macro if you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler
5733 flag such as @option{-melf}.
5736 @defmac MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5737 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5738 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5739 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5740 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5741 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5742 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5745 @defmac SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5746 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5749 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5750 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5751 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5752 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5753 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5754 be emitted as one-only.
5757 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_VISIBILITY
5759 @defmac TARGET_WEAK_NOT_IN_ARCHIVE_TOC
5760 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target's linker expects
5761 that weak symbols do not appear in a static archive's table of contents.
5762 The default is @code{0}.
5764 Leaving weak symbols out of an archive's table of contents means that,
5765 if a symbol will only have a definition in one translation unit and
5766 will have undefined references from other translation units, that
5767 symbol should not be weak. Defining this macro to be nonzero will
5768 thus have the effect that certain symbols that would normally be weak
5769 (explicit template instantiations, and vtables for polymorphic classes
5770 with noninline key methods) will instead be nonweak.
5772 The C++ ABI requires this macro to be zero. Define this macro for
5773 targets where full C++ ABI compliance is impossible and where linker
5774 restrictions require weak symbols to be left out of a static archive's
5778 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5779 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5780 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5781 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5782 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5785 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5786 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5789 @hook TARGET_ASM_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5791 @hook TARGET_ASM_MARK_DECL_PRESERVED
5793 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5794 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5795 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5796 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5797 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5798 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5801 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5803 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SYMBOL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{sym})
5804 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to
5805 @code{SYMBOL_REF} @var{sym}. If not defined, @code{assemble_name}
5806 will be used to output the name of the symbol. This macro may be used
5807 to modify the way a symbol is referenced depending on information
5808 encoded by @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}.
5811 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{buf})
5812 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to @var{buf}, the
5813 result of @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL}. If not defined,
5814 @code{assemble_name} will be used to output the name of the symbol.
5815 This macro is not used by @code{output_asm_label}, or the @code{%l}
5816 specifier that calls it; the intention is that this macro should be set
5817 when it is necessary to output a label differently when its address is
5821 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTERNAL_LABEL
5823 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEBUG_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5824 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a debug info
5825 label whose name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number
5826 @var{num}. This is useful for VLIW targets, where debug info labels
5827 may need to be treated differently than branch target labels. On some
5828 systems, branch target labels must be at the beginning of instruction
5829 bundles, but debug info labels can occur in the middle of instruction
5832 If this macro is not defined, then @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} will be
5836 @defmac ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5837 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5838 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5840 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5841 produce the output that @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} would produce
5842 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5844 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5845 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5846 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5847 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5848 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5849 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5850 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5853 @defmac ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5854 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5855 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5856 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5857 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5859 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5860 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5861 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5862 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5863 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5864 internal static variables in different scopes.
5866 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5867 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5868 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5869 between the name and the number will suffice.
5871 If this macro is not defined, a default definition will be provided
5872 which is correct for most systems.
5875 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5876 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5877 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5880 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5881 correct for most systems.
5884 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5885 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5886 which defines (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5887 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5888 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5889 the tree nodes are available.
5892 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5893 correct for most systems.
5896 @defmac TARGET_DEFERRED_OUTPUT_DEFS (@var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5897 A C statement that evaluates to true if the assembler code which defines
5898 (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name} to have the value
5899 of the tree node @var{decl_of_value} should be emitted near the end of the
5900 current compilation unit. The default is to not defer output of defines.
5901 This macro affects defines output by @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} and
5902 @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS}.
5905 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5906 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5907 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5908 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it defines @var{name} as
5909 an undefined weak symbol.
5911 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5912 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} instead if possible.
5915 @defmac OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5916 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5917 Objective-C methods.
5919 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5920 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5921 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5924 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5925 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5926 systems define other ways of computing names.
5928 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5929 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5930 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5931 50 characters extra.
5933 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5934 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5935 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or @code{NULL} if the method is not
5936 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5938 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5939 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5942 @node Initialization
5943 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5944 @cindex initialization routines
5945 @cindex termination routines
5946 @cindex constructors, output of
5947 @cindex destructors, output of
5949 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5950 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5951 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5952 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5953 @code{main} is called.
5955 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5956 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5959 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5960 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5961 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5962 system, you need to specify how to do this.
5964 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5965 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5966 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5968 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
5969 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
5970 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5971 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5972 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5974 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
5975 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5976 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5977 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5978 pointer containing zero.
5980 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5981 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5982 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5983 list; destructors in forward order.
5985 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5986 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5987 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5988 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5989 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5990 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5991 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5992 Termination functions are handled similarly.
5994 This method will be chosen as the default by @file{target-def.h} if
5995 @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is defined. A target that does not
5996 support arbitrary sections, but does support special designated
5997 constructor and destructor sections may define @code{CTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5998 and @code{DTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP} to achieve the same effect.
6000 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
6001 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
6002 support a @dfn{.init} section which is executed at program startup,
6003 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
6004 program is linked by the @command{gcc} driver like this:
6007 ld -o @var{output_file} crti.o crtbegin.o @dots{} -lgcc crtend.o crtn.o
6010 The prologue of a function (@code{__init}) appears in the @code{.init}
6011 section of @file{crti.o}; the epilogue appears in @file{crtn.o}. Likewise
6012 for the function @code{__fini} in the @dfn{.fini} section. Normally these
6013 files are provided by the operating system or by the GNU C library, but
6014 are provided by GCC for a few targets.
6016 The objects @file{crtbegin.o} and @file{crtend.o} are (for most targets)
6017 compiled from @file{crtstuff.c}. They contain, among other things, code
6018 fragments within the @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections that branch
6019 to routines in the @code{.text} section. The linker will pull all parts
6020 of a section together, which results in a complete @code{__init} function
6021 that invokes the routines we need at startup.
6023 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
6026 If no init section is available, when GCC compiles any function called
6027 @code{main} (or more accurately, any function designated as a program
6028 entry point by the language front end calling @code{expand_main_function}),
6029 it inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
6030 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function is defined
6031 in @file{libgcc2.c} and runs the global constructors.
6033 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
6034 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
6035 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
6036 @code{TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
6037 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
6038 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
6039 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
6040 the value to a @dfn{set}; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
6041 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
6042 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
6043 @code{TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
6044 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
6045 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
6046 the initialization process.
6048 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
6049 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
6050 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'@. In
6051 this case, @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is false, initialization and
6052 termination functions are recognized simply by their names. This requires
6053 an extra program in the linkage step, called @command{collect2}. This program
6054 pretends to be the linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running
6055 the ordinary linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of
6056 initialization and termination functions. These functions are called
6057 via @code{__main} as described above. In order to use this method,
6058 @code{use_collect2} must be defined in the target in @file{config.gcc}.
6061 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
6062 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
6065 @node Macros for Initialization
6066 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
6068 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
6069 and termination functions:
6071 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6072 If defined, a C string constant, including spacing, for the assembler
6073 operation to identify the following data as initialization code. If not
6074 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. When you are
6075 using special sections for initialization and termination functions, this
6076 macro also controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to
6077 run the initialization functions.
6080 @defmac HAS_INIT_SECTION
6081 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
6082 This macro should be defined for systems that control start-up code
6083 on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
6084 be defined explicitly for systems that support @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
6087 @defmac LD_INIT_SWITCH
6088 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6089 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
6092 @defmac LD_FINI_SWITCH
6093 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6094 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
6097 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_INIT_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6098 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6099 automatically called when a shared library is loaded. The function
6100 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6101 the object format requires an explicit initialization function, then a
6102 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DI} will be generated.
6104 This function and the following one are used by collect2 when linking a
6105 shared library that needs constructors or destructors, or has DWARF2
6106 exception tables embedded in the code.
6109 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_FINI_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6110 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6111 automatically called when a shared library is unloaded. The function
6112 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6113 the object format requires an explicit finalization function, then a
6114 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DD} will be generated.
6117 @defmac INVOKE__main
6118 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
6119 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
6120 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
6121 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
6124 @defmac SUPPORTS_INIT_PRIORITY
6125 If nonzero, the C++ @code{init_priority} attribute is supported and the
6126 compiler should emit instructions to control the order of initialization
6127 of objects. If zero, the compiler will issue an error message upon
6128 encountering an @code{init_priority} attribute.
6131 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS
6133 @hook TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR
6135 @hook TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR
6137 If @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is true, the initialization routine
6138 generated for the generated object file will have static linkage.
6140 If your system uses @command{collect2} as the means of processing
6141 constructors, then that program normally uses @command{nm} to scan
6142 an object file for constructor functions to be called.
6144 On certain kinds of systems, you can define this macro to make
6145 @command{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6147 @defmac OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6148 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6149 object files, so that @command{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6150 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6152 This macro is effective only in a native compiler; @command{collect2} as
6153 part of a cross compiler always uses @command{nm} for the target machine.
6156 @defmac REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6157 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6158 to execute @command{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6163 @command{collect2} calls @command{nm} to scan object files for static
6164 constructors and destructors and LTO info. By default, @option{-n} is
6165 passed. Define @code{NM_FLAGS} to a C string constant if other options
6166 are needed to get the same output format as GNU @command{nm -n}
6170 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6171 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6172 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6173 termination functions in shared libraries:
6176 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the program
6177 which lists dynamic dependencies, like @command{ldd} under SunOS 4.
6180 @defmac PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{ptr})
6181 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6182 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{ptr} is a variable
6183 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6184 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6185 code must advance @var{ptr} to the beginning of the filename on that
6186 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{ptr} to @code{NULL}.
6189 @defmac SHLIB_SUFFIX
6190 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the default shared
6191 library extension of the target (e.g., @samp{".so"}). @command{collect2}
6192 strips version information after this suffix when generating global
6193 constructor and destructor names. This define is only needed on targets
6194 that use @command{collect2} to process constructors and destructors.
6197 @node Instruction Output
6198 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6200 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6201 This describes assembler instruction output.
6203 @defmac REGISTER_NAMES
6204 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6205 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6206 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6209 @defmac ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6210 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6211 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6212 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6213 to registers using alternate names.
6216 @defmac OVERLAPPING_REGISTER_NAMES
6217 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a
6218 name, a register number and a count of the number of consecutive
6219 machine registers the name overlaps. This macro defines additional
6220 names for hard registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in
6221 declarations to refer to registers using alternate names. Unlike
6222 @code{ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES}, this macro should be used when the
6223 register name implies multiple underlying registers.
6225 This macro should be used when it is important that a clobber in an
6226 @code{asm} statement clobbers all the underlying values implied by the
6227 register name. For example, on ARM, clobbering the double-precision
6228 VFP register ``d0'' implies clobbering both single-precision registers
6232 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6233 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6234 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6236 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6237 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6238 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6239 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6240 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6241 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6242 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6243 so that it will not be output twice.
6245 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6246 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6247 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6248 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6249 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6251 @findex recog_data.operand
6252 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6253 elements of @code{recog_data.operand}.
6255 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6259 @defmac FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6260 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6261 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6262 they will be output differently.
6264 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6265 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6266 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6267 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6268 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6269 by changing the contents of the vector.
6271 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6272 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6273 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6274 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6275 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6276 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6278 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6281 @hook TARGET_ASM_FINAL_POSTSCAN_INSN
6283 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6284 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6285 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6288 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6289 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6290 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6291 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6292 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6293 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6294 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6297 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6298 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6299 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6300 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6302 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6303 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6304 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6308 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6309 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6310 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6311 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6312 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6316 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6317 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6318 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6319 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6321 @cindex @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6322 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6323 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the hook
6324 @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6325 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler
6329 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6330 @defmac DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND (@var{file})
6331 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6332 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6333 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6334 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6337 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6338 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6339 explicit (e.g.@: with white space).
6342 @findex final_sequence
6343 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6344 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence
6345 (i.e.@: when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6346 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6347 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6351 @defmac REGISTER_PREFIX
6352 @defmacx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6353 @defmacx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6354 @defmacx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6355 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6356 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6357 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6358 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6359 files can define these macros differently.
6362 @defmac ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS (@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6363 If defined this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6364 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6365 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6366 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6367 statements. Note that uppercase letters are reserved for future
6368 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6369 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6370 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6371 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6372 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6375 @defmac ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6376 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6377 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6378 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6381 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6383 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}}
6386 in the output templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the
6387 first argument of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs
6388 @samp{option0}, @samp{option1}, @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6389 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one, two, etc. Any special characters
6390 within these strings retain their usual meaning. If there are fewer
6391 alternatives within the braces than the value of
6392 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT}, the construct outputs nothing. If it's needed
6393 to print curly braces or @samp{|} character in assembler output directly,
6394 @samp{%@{}, @samp{%@}} and @samp{%|} can be used.
6396 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6397 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6398 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6400 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6401 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6402 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6403 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6404 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6405 opcodes or operand order.
6408 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6409 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6410 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6411 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6415 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6416 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6417 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6418 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6422 @node Dispatch Tables
6423 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6425 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6426 This concerns dispatch tables.
6428 @cindex dispatch table
6429 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6430 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6431 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6432 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6433 definitions of these labels are output using
6434 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}, and they must be printed in the same
6435 way here. For example,
6438 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6439 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6442 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6443 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GCC
6444 will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC@.
6445 @var{body} is the body of the @code{ADDR_DIFF_VEC}; it is provided so that the
6446 mode and flags can be read.
6449 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6450 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6451 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6453 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6454 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6455 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6456 definition is output using @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6460 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6464 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6465 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6466 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6467 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}; the fourth argument is the
6468 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_table_data} containing an
6469 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6471 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6474 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6475 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6478 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6479 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6480 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6481 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6482 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6483 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6484 of the preceding label.
6486 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6490 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_UNWIND_LABEL
6492 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_TABLE_LABEL
6494 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_PERSONALITY
6496 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT
6498 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT_BEFORE_INSN
6500 @node Exception Region Output
6501 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6503 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6505 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6508 @defmac EH_FRAME_SECTION_NAME
6509 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing
6510 exception handling frame unwind information. If not defined, GCC will
6511 provide a default definition if the target supports named sections.
6512 @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the appropriate section.
6514 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6515 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6518 @defmac EH_FRAME_IN_DATA_SECTION
6519 If defined, DWARF 2 frame unwind information will be placed in the
6520 data section even though the target supports named sections. This
6521 might be necessary, for instance, if the system linker does garbage
6522 collection and sections cannot be marked as not to be collected.
6524 Do not define this macro unless @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is
6528 @defmac EH_TABLES_CAN_BE_READ_ONLY
6529 Define this macro to 1 if your target is such that no frame unwind
6530 information encoding used with non-PIC code will ever require a
6531 runtime relocation, but the linker may not support merging read-only
6532 and read-write sections into a single read-write section.
6535 @defmac MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6536 An rtx used to mask the return address found via @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX}, so
6537 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6540 @defmac DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6541 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6542 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6543 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6544 @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and @code{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}),
6545 GCC will provide a default definition of 1.
6548 @hook TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO
6549 This hook defines the mechanism that will be used for exception handling
6550 by the target. If the target has ABI specified unwind tables, the hook
6551 should return @code{UI_TARGET}. If the target is to use the
6552 @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling scheme, the hook
6553 should return @code{UI_SJLJ}. If the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6554 information, the hook should return @code{UI_DWARF2}.
6556 A target may, if exceptions are disabled, choose to return @code{UI_NONE}.
6557 This may end up simplifying other parts of target-specific code. The
6558 default implementation of this hook never returns @code{UI_NONE}.
6560 Note that the value returned by this hook should be constant. It should
6561 not depend on anything except the command-line switches described by
6562 @var{opts}. In particular, the
6563 setting @code{UI_SJLJ} must be fixed at compiler start-up as C pre-processor
6564 macros and builtin functions related to exception handling are set up
6565 depending on this setting.
6567 The default implementation of the hook first honors the
6568 @option{--enable-sjlj-exceptions} configure option, then
6569 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}, and finally defaults to @code{UI_SJLJ}. If
6570 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO} depends on command-line options, the target
6571 must define this hook so that @var{opts} is used correctly.
6574 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_TABLES_DEFAULT
6575 This variable should be set to @code{true} if the target ABI requires unwinding
6576 tables even when exceptions are not used. It must not be modified by
6577 command-line option processing.
6580 @defmac DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP
6581 Define this macro to 1 if the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based scheme
6582 should use the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp} functions from the C library
6583 instead of the @code{__builtin_setjmp}/@code{__builtin_longjmp} machinery.
6586 @defmac JMP_BUF_SIZE
6587 This macro has no effect unless @code{DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP} is also
6588 defined. Define this macro if the default size of @code{jmp_buf} buffer
6589 for the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism
6590 is not large enough, or if it is much too large.
6591 The default size is @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof(void *)}.
6594 @defmac DWARF_CIE_DATA_ALIGNMENT
6595 This macro need only be defined if the target might save registers in the
6596 function prologue at an offset to the stack pointer that is not aligned to
6597 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. The definition should be the negative minimum
6598 alignment if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is defined, and the positive
6599 minimum alignment otherwise. @xref{SDB and DWARF}. Only applicable if
6600 the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind information.
6603 @hook TARGET_TERMINATE_DW2_EH_FRAME_INFO
6605 @hook TARGET_DWARF_REGISTER_SPAN
6607 @hook TARGET_INIT_DWARF_REG_SIZES_EXTRA
6609 @hook TARGET_ASM_TTYPE
6611 @hook TARGET_ARM_EABI_UNWINDER
6613 @node Alignment Output
6614 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6616 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6617 This describes commands for alignment.
6619 @defmac JUMP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6620 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which is
6621 a common destination of jumps and has no fallthru incoming edge.
6623 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6624 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6627 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6628 to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6629 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6630 selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{JUMP_ALIGN} implementation.
6633 @hook TARGET_ASM_JUMP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6635 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6636 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6639 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6640 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6644 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6646 @defmac LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6647 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label} that heads
6648 a frequently executed basic block (usually the header of a loop).
6650 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6651 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6654 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6655 to set the variable @code{align_loops} in the target's
6656 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6657 selection in @code{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6660 @hook TARGET_ASM_LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6662 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6663 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6664 If @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER} / @code{LOOP_ALIGN} specify a different alignment,
6665 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6667 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6668 to set the variable @code{align_labels} in the target's
6669 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6670 selection in @code{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6673 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6675 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6676 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6677 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6678 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6679 expression of type @code{unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT}.
6682 @defmac ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6683 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6684 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6685 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6686 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6690 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6691 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6692 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6693 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6696 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN_WITH_NOP (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6697 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN}, except that the ``nop'' instruction is used
6698 for padding, if necessary.
6701 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6702 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6703 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6704 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6705 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6706 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6710 @node Debugging Info
6711 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6713 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6714 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6717 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6718 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6719 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6720 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6721 * SDB and DWARF:: Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
6722 * VMS Debug:: Macros for VMS debug format.
6726 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6728 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6729 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6731 @defmac DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6732 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6733 register number @var{regno}. In the default macro provided, the value
6734 of this expression will be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are
6735 some registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6736 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in the
6737 compiler and another for DBX@.
6739 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6740 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6741 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6742 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6743 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6745 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6746 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6747 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6750 @defmac DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6751 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6752 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6753 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6754 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6755 that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
6756 for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
6757 @option{-g} options is used.
6760 @defmac DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6761 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6762 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6766 @defmac PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6767 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6768 produce when the user specifies just @option{-g}. Define
6769 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6770 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6771 @code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF2_DEBUG},
6772 @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}, @code{VMS_DEBUG}, and @code{VMS_AND_DWARF2_DEBUG}.
6774 When the user specifies @option{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6775 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6776 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined, GCC uses the
6777 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6778 defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6780 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6781 user can always get a specific type of output by using @option{-gstabs},
6782 @option{-gcoff}, @option{-gdwarf-2}, @option{-gxcoff}, or @option{-gvms}.
6786 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6788 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6789 These are specific options for DBX output.
6791 @defmac DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6792 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
6793 in response to the @option{-g} option.
6796 @defmac XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6797 Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6798 in response to the @option{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6801 @defmac DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6802 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6803 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6804 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6805 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6806 if there is any occasion to.
6809 @defmac DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6810 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6811 in the text section.
6814 @defmac ASM_STABS_OP
6815 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6816 use instead of @code{"\t.stabs\t"} to define an ordinary debugging symbol.
6817 If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabs\t"} is used. This macro
6818 applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6821 @defmac ASM_STABD_OP
6822 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6823 use instead of @code{"\t.stabd\t"} to define a debugging symbol whose
6824 value is the current location. If you don't define this macro,
6825 @code{"\t.stabd\t"} is used. This macro applies only to DBX debugging
6829 @defmac ASM_STABN_OP
6830 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6831 use instead of @code{"\t.stabn\t"} to define a debugging symbol with no
6832 name. If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabn\t"} is used. This
6833 macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6836 @defmac DBX_NO_XREFS
6837 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6838 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6839 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6840 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6843 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6844 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6845 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6846 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6847 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6848 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6849 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6850 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6853 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6854 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6855 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6856 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6857 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6858 if backslash is correct for your system.
6861 @defmac DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6862 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6863 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6867 @defmac DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6868 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6869 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6872 @defmac DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6873 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6874 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6875 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6878 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6879 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6880 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6881 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6884 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6885 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6886 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6887 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6890 @defmac DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6891 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6892 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6893 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6897 @defmac DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6898 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol describing
6899 the scope of a block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be
6900 relative to the start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses
6901 an absolute address.
6904 @defmac DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6905 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol indicating
6906 the current line number (@code{N_SLINE}) should be relative to the
6907 start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses an absolute address.
6910 @defmac DBX_USE_BINCL
6911 Define this macro if GCC should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6912 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6913 macro also directs GCC to output a type number as a pair of a file
6914 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GCC does not
6915 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6916 number for a type number.
6920 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6922 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6923 These are hooks for DBX format.
6925 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line}, @var{counter})
6926 A C statement to output DBX debugging information before code for line
6927 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
6928 @var{stream}. @var{counter} is the number of time the macro was
6929 invoked, including the current invocation; it is intended to generate
6930 unique labels in the assembly output.
6932 This macro should not be defined if the default output is correct, or
6933 if it can be made correct by defining @code{DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE}.
6936 @defmac NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6937 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6938 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extension construct.
6939 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6940 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6943 @defmac NO_DBX_BNSYM_ENSYM
6944 Some assemblers cannot handle the @code{.stabd BNSYM/ENSYM,0,0} gdb dbx
6945 extension construct. On those machines, define this macro to turn this
6946 feature off without disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6949 @node File Names and DBX
6950 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
6952 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6953 This describes file names in DBX format.
6955 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6956 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6957 @var{stream}, which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
6958 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
6959 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
6961 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6962 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6964 It may be necessary to refer to a label equal to the beginning of the
6965 text section. You can use @samp{assemble_name (stream, ltext_label_name)}
6966 to do so. If you do this, you must also set the variable
6967 @var{used_ltext_label_name} to @code{true}.
6970 @defmac NO_DBX_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
6971 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6972 of the current directory for compilation and current source language at
6973 the beginning of the file.
6976 @defmac NO_DBX_GCC_MARKER
6977 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6978 that this object file was compiled by GCC@. The default is to emit
6979 an @code{N_OPT} stab at the beginning of every source file, with
6980 @samp{gcc2_compiled.} for the string and value 0.
6983 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6984 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
6985 compilation of the main source file @var{name}. Output should be
6986 written to the stdio stream @var{stream}.
6988 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
6989 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
6992 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_NULL_N_SO_AT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
6993 Define this macro @emph{instead of} defining
6994 @code{DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END}, if what needs to be output at
6995 the end of compilation is an @code{N_SO} stab with an empty string,
6996 whose value is the highest absolute text address in the file.
7001 @subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
7003 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7004 Here are macros for SDB and DWARF output.
7006 @defmac SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
7007 Define this macro if GCC should produce COFF-style debugging output
7008 for SDB in response to the @option{-g} option.
7011 @defmac DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
7012 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
7013 debugging output in response to the @option{-g} option.
7015 @hook TARGET_DWARF_CALLING_CONVENTION
7017 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
7018 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
7019 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
7020 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
7021 as appropriate from @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
7024 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
7025 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
7026 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO}
7027 (@pxref{Exception Region Output}) returns @code{UI_DWARF2}, and
7028 exceptions are enabled, GCC will output this information not matter
7029 how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
7032 @hook TARGET_DEBUG_UNWIND_INFO
7034 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
7035 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
7036 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
7037 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
7040 @hook TARGET_WANT_DEBUG_PUB_SECTIONS
7042 @hook TARGET_FORCE_AT_COMP_DIR
7044 @hook TARGET_DELAY_SCHED2
7046 @hook TARGET_DELAY_VARTRACK
7048 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
7049 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
7050 @var{lab1} minus @var{lab2}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7053 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_VMS_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
7054 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
7055 between the two given labels in system defined units, e.g. instruction
7056 slots on IA64 VMS, using an integer of the given size.
7059 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_OFFSET (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label}, @var{section})
7060 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a
7061 section-relative reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the
7062 given @var{size}. The label is known to be defined in the given @var{section}.
7065 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_PCREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
7066 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a self-relative
7067 reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7070 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_TABLE_REF (@var{label})
7071 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to
7072 the DWARF table identifier @var{label} from the current section. This
7073 is used on some systems to avoid garbage collecting a DWARF table which
7074 is referenced by a function.
7077 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL
7079 @defmac PUT_SDB_@dots{}
7080 Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
7081 SDB assembler directives. See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
7082 macros and their arguments. If the standard syntax is used, you need
7083 not define them yourself.
7087 Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
7088 SDB assembler directives. In that case, define this macro to be the
7089 delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}). It is not necessary to define
7090 a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
7094 @defmac SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
7095 Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
7096 union, or enumeration tags to be emitted. Standard COFF does not
7097 allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
7101 @defmac SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
7102 Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
7103 enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled. Some
7104 assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
7107 @defmac SDB_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
7108 A C statement to output SDB debugging information before code for line
7109 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
7110 @var{stream}. The default is to emit an @code{.ln} directive.
7115 @subsection Macros for VMS Debug Format
7117 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7118 Here are macros for VMS debug format.
7120 @defmac VMS_DEBUGGING_INFO
7121 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for VMS
7122 in response to the @option{-g} option. The default behavior for VMS
7123 is to generate minimal debug info for a traceback in the absence of
7124 @option{-g} unless explicitly overridden with @option{-g0}. This
7125 behavior is controlled by @code{TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION} and
7126 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.
7129 @node Floating Point
7130 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
7131 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
7132 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
7134 While all modern machines use twos-complement representation for integers,
7135 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
7136 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
7137 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
7138 doing the compilation.
7140 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
7141 range and precision, all floating point constants must be represented in
7142 the target machine's format. Therefore, the cross compiler cannot
7143 safely use the host machine's floating point arithmetic; it must emulate
7144 the target's arithmetic. To ensure consistency, GCC always uses
7145 emulation to work with floating point values, even when the host and
7146 target floating point formats are identical.
7148 The following macros are provided by @file{real.h} for the compiler to
7149 use. All parts of the compiler which generate or optimize
7150 floating-point calculations must use these macros. They may evaluate
7151 their operands more than once, so operands must not have side effects.
7153 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7154 The C data type to be used to hold a floating point value in the target
7155 machine's format. Typically this is a @code{struct} containing an
7156 array of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, but all code should treat it as an opaque
7160 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{y})
7161 Compares for equality the two values, @var{x} and @var{y}. If the target
7162 floating point format supports negative zeroes and/or NaNs,
7163 @samp{REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (-0.0, 0.0)} is true, and
7164 @samp{REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (NaN, NaN)} is false.
7167 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUES_LESS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{y})
7168 Tests whether @var{x} is less than @var{y}.
7171 @deftypefn Macro HOST_WIDE_INT REAL_VALUE_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7172 Truncates @var{x} to a signed integer, rounding toward zero.
7175 @deftypefn Macro {unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT} REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7176 Truncates @var{x} to an unsigned integer, rounding toward zero. If
7177 @var{x} is negative, returns zero.
7180 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ATOF (const char *@var{string}, enum machine_mode @var{mode})
7181 Converts @var{string} into a floating point number in the target machine's
7182 representation for mode @var{mode}. This routine can handle both
7183 decimal and hexadecimal floating point constants, using the syntax
7184 defined by the C language for both.
7187 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7188 Returns 1 if @var{x} is negative (including negative zero), 0 otherwise.
7191 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISINF (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7192 Determines whether @var{x} represents infinity (positive or negative).
7195 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7196 Determines whether @var{x} represents a ``NaN'' (not-a-number).
7199 @deftypefn Macro void REAL_ARITHMETIC (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{output}, enum tree_code @var{code}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{y})
7200 Calculates an arithmetic operation on the two floating point values
7201 @var{x} and @var{y}, storing the result in @var{output} (which must be a
7204 The operation to be performed is specified by @var{code}. Only the
7205 following codes are supported: @code{PLUS_EXPR}, @code{MINUS_EXPR},
7206 @code{MULT_EXPR}, @code{RDIV_EXPR}, @code{MAX_EXPR}, @code{MIN_EXPR}.
7208 If @code{REAL_ARITHMETIC} is asked to evaluate division by zero and the
7209 target's floating point format cannot represent infinity, it will call
7210 @code{abort}. Callers should check for this situation first, using
7211 @code{MODE_HAS_INFINITIES}. @xref{Storage Layout}.
7214 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7215 Returns the negative of the floating point value @var{x}.
7218 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ABS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7219 Returns the absolute value of @var{x}.
7222 @node Mode Switching
7223 @section Mode Switching Instructions
7224 @cindex mode switching
7225 The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
7227 @defmac OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
7228 Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
7229 switching in an optimizing compilation.
7231 For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
7232 floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
7233 the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
7234 operation, this bit has to be set. Changing the PR bit requires a general
7235 purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
7236 be inserted before reload, i.e.@: you can't put this into instruction emitting
7237 or @code{TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG}.
7239 You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, and select at run time
7240 which entities actually need it. @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should
7241 return nonzero for any @var{entity} that needs mode-switching.
7242 If you define this macro, you also have to define
7243 @code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{TARGET_MODE_NEEDED},
7244 @code{TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY} and @code{TARGET_MODE_EMIT}.
7245 @code{TARGET_MODE_AFTER}, @code{TARGET_MODE_ENTRY}, and @code{TARGET_MODE_EXIT}
7249 @defmac NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7250 If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
7251 initializer for an array of integers. Each initializer element
7252 N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
7253 of different modes that might need to be set for this entity.
7254 The position of the initializer in the initializer---starting counting at
7255 zero---determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
7257 In macros that take mode arguments / yield a mode result, modes are
7258 represented as numbers 0 @dots{} N @minus{} 1. N is used to specify that no mode
7259 switch is needed / supplied.
7262 @hook TARGET_MODE_EMIT
7264 @hook TARGET_MODE_NEEDED
7266 @hook TARGET_MODE_AFTER
7268 @hook TARGET_MODE_ENTRY
7270 @hook TARGET_MODE_EXIT
7272 @hook TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY
7274 @node Target Attributes
7275 @section Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}
7276 @cindex target attributes
7277 @cindex machine attributes
7278 @cindex attributes, target-specific
7280 Target-specific attributes may be defined for functions, data and types.
7281 These are described using the following target hooks; they also need to
7282 be documented in @file{extend.texi}.
7284 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE
7286 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TAKES_IDENTIFIER_P
7288 @hook TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7290 @hook TARGET_SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7292 @hook TARGET_MERGE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7294 @hook TARGET_MERGE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7296 @hook TARGET_VALID_DLLIMPORT_ATTRIBUTE_P
7298 @defmac TARGET_DECLSPEC
7299 Define this macro to a nonzero value if you want to treat
7300 @code{__declspec(X)} as equivalent to @code{__attribute((X))}. By
7301 default, this behavior is enabled only for targets that define
7302 @code{TARGET_DLLIMPORT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES}. The current implementation
7303 of @code{__declspec} is via a built-in macro, but you should not rely
7304 on this implementation detail.
7307 @hook TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7309 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P
7311 @hook TARGET_OPTION_VALID_ATTRIBUTE_P
7313 @hook TARGET_OPTION_SAVE
7315 @hook TARGET_OPTION_RESTORE
7317 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRINT
7319 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRAGMA_PARSE
7321 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE
7323 @hook TARGET_OPTION_FUNCTION_VERSIONS
7325 @hook TARGET_CAN_INLINE_P
7328 @section Emulating TLS
7329 @cindex Emulated TLS
7331 For targets whose psABI does not provide Thread Local Storage via
7332 specific relocations and instruction sequences, an emulation layer is
7333 used. A set of target hooks allows this emulation layer to be
7334 configured for the requirements of a particular target. For instance
7335 the psABI may in fact specify TLS support in terms of an emulation
7338 The emulation layer works by creating a control object for every TLS
7339 object. To access the TLS object, a lookup function is provided
7340 which, when given the address of the control object, will return the
7341 address of the current thread's instance of the TLS object.
7343 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_GET_ADDRESS
7345 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_REGISTER_COMMON
7347 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_SECTION
7349 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_SECTION
7351 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_PREFIX
7353 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_PREFIX
7355 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_FIELDS
7357 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_INIT
7359 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_ALIGN_FIXED
7361 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_DEBUG_FORM_TLS_ADDRESS
7363 @node MIPS Coprocessors
7364 @section Defining coprocessor specifics for MIPS targets.
7365 @cindex MIPS coprocessor-definition macros
7367 The MIPS specification allows MIPS implementations to have as many as 4
7368 coprocessors, each with as many as 32 private registers. GCC supports
7369 accessing these registers and transferring values between the registers
7370 and memory using asm-ized variables. For example:
7373 register unsigned int cp0count asm ("c0r1");
7379 (``c0r1'' is the default name of register 1 in coprocessor 0; alternate
7380 names may be added as described below, or the default names may be
7381 overridden entirely in @code{SUBTARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}.)
7383 Coprocessor registers are assumed to be epilogue-used; sets to them will
7384 be preserved even if it does not appear that the register is used again
7385 later in the function.
7387 Another note: according to the MIPS spec, coprocessor 1 (if present) is
7388 the FPU@. One accesses COP1 registers through standard mips
7389 floating-point support; they are not included in this mechanism.
7392 @section Parameters for Precompiled Header Validity Checking
7393 @cindex parameters, precompiled headers
7395 @hook TARGET_GET_PCH_VALIDITY
7397 @hook TARGET_PCH_VALID_P
7399 @hook TARGET_CHECK_PCH_TARGET_FLAGS
7401 @hook TARGET_PREPARE_PCH_SAVE
7404 @section C++ ABI parameters
7405 @cindex parameters, c++ abi
7407 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_TYPE
7409 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_MASK_BIT
7411 @hook TARGET_CXX_GET_COOKIE_SIZE
7413 @hook TARGET_CXX_COOKIE_HAS_SIZE
7415 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPORT_EXPORT_CLASS
7417 @hook TARGET_CXX_CDTOR_RETURNS_THIS
7419 @hook TARGET_CXX_KEY_METHOD_MAY_BE_INLINE
7421 @hook TARGET_CXX_DETERMINE_CLASS_DATA_VISIBILITY
7423 @hook TARGET_CXX_CLASS_DATA_ALWAYS_COMDAT
7425 @hook TARGET_CXX_LIBRARY_RTTI_COMDAT
7427 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_AEABI_ATEXIT
7429 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_ATEXIT_FOR_CXA_ATEXIT
7431 @hook TARGET_CXX_ADJUST_CLASS_AT_DEFINITION
7433 @hook TARGET_CXX_DECL_MANGLING_CONTEXT
7435 @node Named Address Spaces
7436 @section Adding support for named address spaces
7437 @cindex named address spaces
7439 The draft technical report of the ISO/IEC JTC1 S22 WG14 N1275
7440 standards committee, @cite{Programming Languages - C - Extensions to
7441 support embedded processors}, specifies a syntax for embedded
7442 processors to specify alternate address spaces. You can configure a
7443 GCC port to support section 5.1 of the draft report to add support for
7444 address spaces other than the default address space. These address
7445 spaces are new keywords that are similar to the @code{volatile} and
7446 @code{const} type attributes.
7448 Pointers to named address spaces can have a different size than
7449 pointers to the generic address space.
7451 For example, the SPU port uses the @code{__ea} address space to refer
7452 to memory in the host processor, rather than memory local to the SPU
7453 processor. Access to memory in the @code{__ea} address space involves
7454 issuing DMA operations to move data between the host processor and the
7455 local processor memory address space. Pointers in the @code{__ea}
7456 address space are either 32 bits or 64 bits based on the
7457 @option{-mea32} or @option{-mea64} switches (native SPU pointers are
7460 Internally, address spaces are represented as a small integer in the
7461 range 0 to 15 with address space 0 being reserved for the generic
7464 To register a named address space qualifier keyword with the C front end,
7465 the target may call the @code{c_register_addr_space} routine. For example,
7466 the SPU port uses the following to declare @code{__ea} as the keyword for
7467 named address space #1:
7469 #define ADDR_SPACE_EA 1
7470 c_register_addr_space ("__ea", ADDR_SPACE_EA);
7473 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_POINTER_MODE
7475 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ADDRESS_MODE
7477 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_VALID_POINTER_MODE
7479 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
7481 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
7483 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_SUBSET_P
7485 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT
7488 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7489 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7491 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7492 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7494 @defmac HAS_LONG_COND_BRANCH
7495 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7496 has conditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7497 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7498 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7499 set to false, gcc will convert any conditional branches that attempt
7500 to cross between sections into unconditional branches or indirect jumps.
7503 @defmac HAS_LONG_UNCOND_BRANCH
7504 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7505 has unconditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7506 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7507 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7508 set to false, gcc will convert any unconditional branches that attempt
7509 to cross between sections into indirect jumps.
7512 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7513 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7514 elements of a jump-table should have.
7517 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7518 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7519 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7520 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7521 To make this work, you also have to define @code{INSN_ALIGN} and
7522 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7523 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7524 flags can be updated.
7527 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7528 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7529 should contain relative addresses. You need not define this macro if
7530 jump-tables never contain relative addresses, or jump-tables should
7531 contain relative addresses only when @option{-fPIC} or @option{-fPIC}
7535 @hook TARGET_CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7537 @defmac WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7538 Define this macro if operations between registers with integral mode
7539 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
7540 Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7543 @defmac LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mem_mode})
7544 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7545 memory in @var{mem_mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7546 bits outside of @var{mem_mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7547 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7548 of @var{mem_mode} for which the
7549 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7550 @code{UNKNOWN} for other modes.
7552 This macro is not called with @var{mem_mode} non-integral or with a width
7553 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7554 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7555 @code{UNKNOWN}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7556 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7558 You may return a non-@code{UNKNOWN} value even if for some hard registers
7559 the sign extension is not performed, if for the @code{REGNO_REG_CLASS}
7560 of these hard registers @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} returns nonzero
7561 when the @var{from} mode is @var{mem_mode} and the @var{to} mode is any
7562 integral mode larger than this but not larger than @code{word_mode}.
7564 You must return @code{UNKNOWN} if for some hard registers that allow this
7565 mode, @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} says that they cannot change to
7566 @code{word_mode}, but that they can change to another integral mode that
7567 is larger then @var{mem_mode} but still smaller than @code{word_mode}.
7570 @defmac SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7571 Define this macro if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7575 @hook TARGET_MIN_DIVISIONS_FOR_RECIP_MUL
7578 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7579 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7582 @defmac MAX_MOVE_MAX
7583 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7584 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7585 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7586 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7590 @defmac SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7591 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7592 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7593 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7594 this macro is nonzero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7595 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7596 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7597 instructions that act on bit-fields at variable positions, which may
7598 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7599 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7600 arguments to bit-field instructions.
7602 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7603 position (for bit-field operations), or if no variable-position bit-field
7604 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7606 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7607 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7608 bit-field operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7609 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7610 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7612 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7615 @anchor{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}
7616 @hook TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK
7618 @defmac TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
7619 A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
7620 ``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
7621 bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
7622 operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
7624 On many machines, this expression can be 1.
7626 @c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that". this was
7627 @c to fix an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
7628 When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
7629 modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
7630 If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
7631 such cases may improve things.
7634 @hook TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED
7636 @defmac STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7637 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7638 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7639 (@samp{cstore@var{mode}4}) when the condition is true. This description must
7640 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} patterns and all the
7641 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7643 A value of 1 or @minus{}1 means that the instruction implementing the
7644 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or @minus{}1 when the comparison is true
7645 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7646 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7647 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7648 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7649 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7650 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7653 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or @minus{}1, the compiler will
7654 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7655 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7656 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7657 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7658 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7659 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7663 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7670 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7674 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7675 tested into the sign bit.
7677 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7678 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7679 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7680 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7681 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7682 comparison operators and let us know at @email{gcc@@gcc.gnu.org}.
7684 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7685 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7686 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7691 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7692 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7693 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7694 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7695 combine the normalization with other operations.
7698 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or @minus{}1, with @minus{}1 being
7699 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7703 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7704 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7708 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7711 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7712 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7713 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7714 those cases, e.g., one matching
7717 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7720 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7721 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7722 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7723 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7724 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7725 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7726 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptimizer can be used to
7727 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7729 If this macro is not defined, the default value, 1, is used. You need
7730 not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7731 instructions, or if the value generated by these instructions is 1.
7734 @defmac FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7735 A C expression that gives a nonzero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
7736 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7737 Define this macro on machines that have comparison operations that return
7738 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7742 @defmac VECTOR_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7743 A C expression that gives a rtx representing the nonzero true element
7744 for vector comparisons. The returned rtx should be valid for the inner
7745 mode of @var{mode} which is guaranteed to be a vector mode. Define
7746 this macro on machines that have vector comparison operations that
7747 return a vector result. If there are no such operations, do not define
7748 this macro. Typically, this macro is defined as @code{const1_rtx} or
7749 @code{constm1_rtx}. This macro may return @code{NULL_RTX} to prevent
7750 the compiler optimizing such vector comparison operations for the
7754 @defmac CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7755 @defmacx CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7756 A C expression that indicates whether the architecture defines a value
7757 for @code{clz} or @code{ctz} with a zero operand.
7758 A result of @code{0} indicates the value is undefined.
7759 If the value is defined for only the RTL expression, the macro should
7760 evaluate to @code{1}; if the value applies also to the corresponding optab
7761 entry (which is normally the case if it expands directly into
7762 the corresponding RTL), then the macro should evaluate to @code{2}.
7763 In the cases where the value is defined, @var{value} should be set to
7766 If this macro is not defined, the value of @code{clz} or
7767 @code{ctz} at zero is assumed to be undefined.
7769 This macro must be defined if the target's expansion for @code{ffs}
7770 relies on a particular value to get correct results. Otherwise it
7771 is not necessary, though it may be used to optimize some corner cases, and
7772 to provide a default expansion for the @code{ffs} optab.
7774 Note that regardless of this macro the ``definedness'' of @code{clz}
7775 and @code{ctz} at zero do @emph{not} extend to the builtin functions
7776 visible to the user. Thus one may be free to adjust the value at will
7777 to match the target expansion of these operations without fear of
7782 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7783 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7784 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7785 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7786 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7788 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7789 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7790 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7794 @defmac FUNCTION_MODE
7795 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7796 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most CISC machines,
7797 where an instruction can begin at any byte address, this should be
7798 @code{QImode}. On most RISC machines, where all instructions have fixed
7799 size and alignment, this should be a mode with the same size and alignment
7800 as the machine instruction words - typically @code{SImode} or @code{HImode}.
7803 @defmac STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS
7804 In normal operation, the preprocessor expands @code{__STDC__} to the
7805 constant 1, to signify that GCC conforms to ISO Standard C@. On some
7806 hosts, like Solaris, the system compiler uses a different convention,
7807 where @code{__STDC__} is normally 0, but is 1 if the user specifies
7808 strict conformance to the C Standard.
7810 Defining @code{STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS} makes GNU CPP follows the host
7811 convention when processing system header files, but when processing user
7812 files @code{__STDC__} will always expand to 1.
7815 @hook TARGET_C_PREINCLUDE
7817 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7819 @defmac NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7820 Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C@.
7821 This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7822 C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7823 @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7828 @defmac REGISTER_TARGET_PRAGMAS ()
7829 Define this macro if you want to implement any target-specific pragmas.
7830 If defined, it is a C expression which makes a series of calls to
7831 @code{c_register_pragma} or @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion}
7832 for each pragma. The macro may also do any
7833 setup required for the pragmas.
7835 The primary reason to define this macro is to provide compatibility with
7836 other compilers for the same target. In general, we discourage
7837 definition of target-specific pragmas for GCC@.
7839 If the pragma can be implemented by attributes then you should consider
7840 defining the target hook @samp{TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} as well.
7842 Preprocessor macros that appear on pragma lines are not expanded. All
7843 @samp{#pragma} directives that do not match any registered pragma are
7844 silently ignored, unless the user specifies @option{-Wunknown-pragmas}.
7847 @deftypefun void c_register_pragma (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7848 @deftypefunx void c_register_pragma_with_expansion (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7850 Each call to @code{c_register_pragma} or
7851 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} establishes one pragma. The
7852 @var{callback} routine will be called when the preprocessor encounters a
7856 #pragma [@var{space}] @var{name} @dots{}
7859 @var{space} is the case-sensitive namespace of the pragma, or
7860 @code{NULL} to put the pragma in the global namespace. The callback
7861 routine receives @var{pfile} as its first argument, which can be passed
7862 on to cpplib's functions if necessary. You can lex tokens after the
7863 @var{name} by calling @code{pragma_lex}. Tokens that are not read by the
7864 callback will be silently ignored. The end of the line is indicated by
7865 a token of type @code{CPP_EOF}. Macro expansion occurs on the
7866 arguments of pragmas registered with
7867 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} but not on the arguments of
7868 pragmas registered with @code{c_register_pragma}.
7870 Note that the use of @code{pragma_lex} is specific to the C and C++
7871 compilers. It will not work in the Java or Fortran compilers, or any
7872 other language compilers for that matter. Thus if @code{pragma_lex} is going
7873 to be called from target-specific code, it must only be done so when
7874 building the C and C++ compilers. This can be done by defining the
7875 variables @code{c_target_objs} and @code{cxx_target_objs} in the
7876 target entry in the @file{config.gcc} file. These variables should name
7877 the target-specific, language-specific object file which contains the
7878 code that uses @code{pragma_lex}. Note it will also be necessary to add a
7879 rule to the makefile fragment pointed to by @code{tmake_file} that shows
7880 how to build this object file.
7883 @defmac HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_WITH_EXPANSION
7884 Define this macro if macros should be expanded in the
7885 arguments of @samp{#pragma pack}.
7888 @defmac TARGET_DEFAULT_PACK_STRUCT
7889 If your target requires a structure packing default other than 0 (meaning
7890 the machine default), define this macro to the necessary value (in bytes).
7891 This must be a value that would also be valid to use with
7892 @samp{#pragma pack()} (that is, a small power of two).
7895 @defmac DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7896 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in
7897 identifier names for the C family of languages. 0 means @samp{$} is
7898 not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed. 1 is the default;
7899 there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7902 @defmac INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7903 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7904 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7905 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7906 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7907 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7908 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7909 you should define this macro.
7911 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7914 @defmac INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7915 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7916 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7917 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7918 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7919 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7920 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7921 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7922 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7925 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7928 @defmac MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7929 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if, in some cases,
7930 global symbols from one translation unit may not be bound to undefined
7931 symbols in another translation unit without user intervention. For
7932 instance, under Microsoft Windows symbols must be explicitly imported
7933 from shared libraries (DLLs).
7935 You need not define this macro if it would always evaluate to zero.
7938 @hook TARGET_MD_ASM_CLOBBERS
7940 @defmac MATH_LIBRARY
7941 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
7942 in the system math library, minus the initial @samp{"-l"}, or
7943 @samp{""} if the target does not have a
7944 separate math library.
7946 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"m"} is wrong.
7949 @defmac LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7950 Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
7951 specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
7953 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
7957 @defmac TARGET_POSIX_IO
7958 Define this macro if the target supports the following POSIX@ file
7959 functions, access, mkdir and file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW@.
7960 Defining @code{TARGET_POSIX_IO} will enable the test coverage code
7961 to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
7962 if the program has forked. It will also create directories at run-time
7963 for cross-profiling.
7966 @defmac MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
7968 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
7969 conditional execution instructions instead of a branch. A value of
7970 @code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default if the machine does not use cc0, and
7971 1 if it does use cc0.
7974 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7975 Used if the target needs to perform machine-dependent modifications on the
7976 conditionals used for turning basic blocks into conditionally executed code.
7977 @var{ce_info} points to a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which
7978 contains information about the currently processed blocks. @var{true_expr}
7979 and @var{false_expr} are the tests that are used for converting the
7980 then-block and the else-block, respectively. Set either @var{true_expr} or
7981 @var{false_expr} to a null pointer if the tests cannot be converted.
7984 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_MULTIPLE_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{bb}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7985 Like @code{IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS}, but used when converting more complicated
7986 if-statements into conditions combined by @code{and} and @code{or} operations.
7987 @var{bb} contains the basic block that contains the test that is currently
7988 being processed and about to be turned into a condition.
7991 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN (@var{ce_info}, @var{pattern}, @var{insn})
7992 A C expression to modify the @var{PATTERN} of an @var{INSN} that is to
7993 be converted to conditional execution format. @var{ce_info} points to
7994 a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which contains information
7995 about the currently processed blocks.
7998 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL (@var{ce_info})
7999 A C expression to perform any final machine dependent modifications in
8000 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
8001 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
8002 to by @var{ce_info}.
8005 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL (@var{ce_info})
8006 A C expression to cancel any machine dependent modifications in
8007 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
8008 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
8009 to by @var{ce_info}.
8012 @defmac IFCVT_MACHDEP_INIT (@var{ce_info})
8013 A C expression to initialize any machine specific data for if-conversion
8014 of the if-block in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
8015 to by @var{ce_info}.
8018 @hook TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
8020 @hook TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS
8022 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_DECL
8024 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN
8026 @hook TARGET_RESOLVE_OVERLOADED_BUILTIN
8028 @hook TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN
8030 @hook TARGET_GIMPLE_FOLD_BUILTIN
8032 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_VERSION_PRIORITY
8034 @hook TARGET_GET_FUNCTION_VERSIONS_DISPATCHER
8036 @hook TARGET_GENERATE_VERSION_DISPATCHER_BODY
8038 @hook TARGET_CAN_USE_DOLOOP_P
8040 @hook TARGET_INVALID_WITHIN_DOLOOP
8042 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_COMBINED_INSN
8044 @defmac MD_CAN_REDIRECT_BRANCH (@var{branch1}, @var{branch2})
8046 Take a branch insn in @var{branch1} and another in @var{branch2}.
8047 Return true if redirecting @var{branch1} to the destination of
8048 @var{branch2} is possible.
8050 On some targets, branches may have a limited range. Optimizing the
8051 filling of delay slots can result in branches being redirected, and this
8052 may in turn cause a branch offset to overflow.
8055 @hook TARGET_CAN_FOLLOW_JUMP
8057 @hook TARGET_COMMUTATIVE_P
8059 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_INITIAL_VALUE
8061 @hook TARGET_UNSPEC_MAY_TRAP_P
8063 @hook TARGET_SET_CURRENT_FUNCTION
8065 @defmac TARGET_OBJECT_SUFFIX
8066 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix for object
8067 files on your target machine. If you do not define this macro, GCC will
8068 use @samp{.o} as the suffix for object files.
8071 @defmac TARGET_EXECUTABLE_SUFFIX
8072 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix to be
8073 automatically added to executable files on your target machine. If you
8074 do not define this macro, GCC will use the null string as the suffix for
8078 @defmac COLLECT_EXPORT_LIST
8079 If defined, @code{collect2} will scan the individual object files
8080 specified on its command line and create an export list for the linker.
8081 Define this macro for systems like AIX, where the linker discards
8082 object files that are not referenced from @code{main} and uses export
8086 @defmac MODIFY_JNI_METHOD_CALL (@var{mdecl})
8087 Define this macro to a C expression representing a variant of the
8088 method call @var{mdecl}, if Java Native Interface (JNI) methods
8089 must be invoked differently from other methods on your target.
8090 For example, on 32-bit Microsoft Windows, JNI methods must be invoked using
8091 the @code{stdcall} calling convention and this macro is then
8092 defined as this expression:
8095 build_type_attribute_variant (@var{mdecl},
8097 (get_identifier ("stdcall"),
8102 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_MODIFY_JUMPS_P
8104 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CLASS
8106 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CALLEE_SAVED
8108 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTION
8110 @hook TARGET_LOOP_UNROLL_ADJUST
8112 @defmac POWI_MAX_MULTS
8113 If defined, this macro is interpreted as a signed integer C expression
8114 that specifies the maximum number of floating point multiplications
8115 that should be emitted when expanding exponentiation by an integer
8116 constant inline. When this value is defined, exponentiation requiring
8117 more than this number of multiplications is implemented by calling the
8118 system library's @code{pow}, @code{powf} or @code{powl} routines.
8119 The default value places no upper bound on the multiplication count.
8122 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8123 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8124 target. The parameter @var{stdinc} indicates if normal include files
8125 are present. The parameter @var{sysroot} is the system root directory.
8126 The parameter @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8129 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_PRE_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8130 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8131 target before any standard headers. The parameter @var{stdinc}
8132 indicates if normal include files are present. The parameter
8133 @var{sysroot} is the system root directory. The parameter
8134 @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8137 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_OPTF (char *@var{path})
8138 This target hook should register special include paths for the target.
8139 The parameter @var{path} is the include to register. On Darwin
8140 systems, this is used for Framework includes, which have semantics
8141 that are different from @option{-I}.
8144 @defmac bool TARGET_USE_LOCAL_THUNK_ALIAS_P (tree @var{fndecl})
8145 This target macro returns @code{true} if it is safe to use a local alias
8146 for a virtual function @var{fndecl} when constructing thunks,
8147 @code{false} otherwise. By default, the macro returns @code{true} for all
8148 functions, if a target supports aliases (i.e.@: defines
8149 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF}), @code{false} otherwise,
8152 @defmac TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES
8153 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8154 target-specific format checking information for the @option{-Wformat}
8155 option. The default is to have no target-specific format checks.
8158 @defmac TARGET_N_FORMAT_TYPES
8159 If defined, this macro is the number of entries in
8160 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES}.
8163 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES
8164 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8165 target-specific format overrides for the @option{-Wformat} option. The
8166 default is to have no target-specific format overrides. If defined,
8167 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES} must be defined, too.
8170 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES_COUNT
8171 If defined, this macro specifies the number of entries in
8172 @code{TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES}.
8175 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_INIT
8176 If defined, this macro specifies the optional initialization
8177 routine for target specific customizations of the system printf
8178 and scanf formatter settings.
8181 @hook TARGET_RELAXED_ORDERING
8183 @hook TARGET_INVALID_ARG_FOR_UNPROTOTYPED_FN
8185 @hook TARGET_INVALID_CONVERSION
8187 @hook TARGET_INVALID_UNARY_OP
8189 @hook TARGET_INVALID_BINARY_OP
8191 @hook TARGET_INVALID_PARAMETER_TYPE
8193 @hook TARGET_INVALID_RETURN_TYPE
8195 @hook TARGET_PROMOTED_TYPE
8197 @hook TARGET_CONVERT_TO_TYPE
8199 @defmac TARGET_USE_JCR_SECTION
8200 This macro determines whether to use the JCR section to register Java
8201 classes. By default, TARGET_USE_JCR_SECTION is defined to 1 if both
8202 SUPPORTS_WEAK and TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS are true, else 0.
8206 This macro determines the size of the objective C jump buffer for the
8207 NeXT runtime. By default, OBJC_JBLEN is defined to an innocuous value.
8210 @defmac LIBGCC2_UNWIND_ATTRIBUTE
8211 Define this macro if any target-specific attributes need to be attached
8212 to the functions in @file{libgcc} that provide low-level support for
8213 call stack unwinding. It is used in declarations in @file{unwind-generic.h}
8214 and the associated definitions of those functions.
8217 @hook TARGET_UPDATE_STACK_BOUNDARY
8219 @hook TARGET_GET_DRAP_RTX
8221 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_STACK_SLOTS_FOR_ARGS
8223 @hook TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR
8225 @hook TARGET_ASAN_SHADOW_OFFSET
8227 @hook TARGET_MEMMODEL_CHECK
8229 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_TEST_AND_SET_TRUEVAL
8231 @hook TARGET_HAS_IFUNC_P
8233 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ALIGN_FOR_MODE
8235 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ASSIGN_EXPAND_FENV
8237 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT
8239 On older ports, large integers are stored in @code{CONST_DOUBLE} rtl
8240 objects. Newer ports define @code{TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT} to be nonzero
8241 to indicate that large integers are stored in
8242 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} rtl objects. The @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} allows
8243 very large integer constants to be represented. @code{CONST_DOUBLE}
8244 is limited to twice the size of the host's @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}
8247 Converting a port mostly requires looking for the places where
8248 @code{CONST_DOUBLE}s are used with @code{VOIDmode} and replacing that
8249 code with code that accesses @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. @samp{"grep -i
8250 const_double"} at the port level gets you to 95% of the changes that
8251 need to be made. There are a few places that require a deeper look.
8255 There is no equivalent to @code{hval} and @code{lval} for
8256 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. This would be difficult to express in the md
8257 language since there are a variable number of elements.
8259 Most ports only check that @code{hval} is either 0 or -1 to see if the
8260 value is small. As mentioned above, this will no longer be necessary
8261 since small constants are always @code{CONST_INT}. Of course there
8262 are still a few exceptions, the alpha's constraint used by the zap
8263 instruction certainly requires careful examination by C code.
8264 However, all the current code does is pass the hval and lval to C
8265 code, so evolving the c code to look at the @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} is
8266 not really a large change.
8269 Because there is no standard template that ports use to materialize
8270 constants, there is likely to be some futzing that is unique to each
8274 The rtx costs may have to be adjusted to properly account for larger
8275 constants that are represented as @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}.
8278 All and all it does not take long to convert ports that the
8279 maintainer is familiar with.